WO2019214699A1 - Control information receiving method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Control information receiving method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019214699A1
WO2019214699A1 PCT/CN2019/086323 CN2019086323W WO2019214699A1 WO 2019214699 A1 WO2019214699 A1 WO 2019214699A1 CN 2019086323 W CN2019086323 W CN 2019086323W WO 2019214699 A1 WO2019214699 A1 WO 2019214699A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
synchronization signal
signal block
time domain
control information
terminal device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/086323
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
才宇
何彦召
王达
王键
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2019214699A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019214699A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/001Synchronization between nodes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/005Transmission of information for alerting of incoming communication
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method and a communication device for receiving control information.
  • a paging technology is adopted, that is, when the terminal device has no data to transmit or receive, the radio frequency modem can be turned off.
  • the paging message sent by the network device wakes up its radio modem to transmit or receive data.
  • the paging process is: the network device sends a paging message to the terminal device in the determined time domain location, and the terminal device wakes up in the determined time domain location, first according to the cell specific reference in the downlink subframe.
  • the cell-specific reference signals (CRS) are downlink synchronized, and after the downlink synchronization is completed, the paging message is received according to the synchronized system information, and the paging process is completed.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for receiving control information and a communication device for receiving control information.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for receiving control information, where the method includes: first, before receiving the control information, the terminal device first determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter set, a time domain location where the control information is located, The first parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and then receives the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located.
  • the terminal device determines a time domain location for receiving control information according to a time domain location where the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and implements receiving control information without CRS, and adopts The time domain position of the received control information determined in this manner is close to or the same as the time domain position of the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time, so that the terminal device can perform downlink according to the synchronization signal block before receiving the control information. Synchronization, after completing the downlink synchronization, receiving the control information at the time domain location can ensure the effectiveness of the synchronization.
  • the terminal device can complete the process according to the synchronization signal block during the wake-up process.
  • the cell measurement and receiving the control information can save power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter when the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, when the first parameter includes the time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain location where the control information is located and the measurement time of the synchronization signal block are located The interval between time domain locations is determined based on the identity of the terminal device.
  • the terminal when there are multiple time domain locations for receiving the control information in the vicinity of the time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or the time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the terminal may be determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the devices are grouped, and different groups correspond to one of the time domain locations for receiving the control information, thereby reducing the number of terminal devices that are paged in one time domain location, and reducing the operation of the network device. the complexity.
  • the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the terminal device Monitoring a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, where the first parameter includes the synchronization signal block measurement time In the case of the time domain position, the time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the terminal device may further determine, according to the index of the synchronization signal block, the control information for receiving the control information.
  • the time domain position can be ensured to determine that the position for receiving the control information is close to the time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, thereby improving the effectiveness of the synchronization signal block.
  • the terminal device may further determine the location for receiving the control information according to the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information and/or the index of the synchronization signal block, and may increase the flexibility of the terminal device.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain location after the offset is increased by the first time domain location
  • the first time domain location is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
  • the second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • the synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is;
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may adjust the time domain location for receiving the control information by using an offset determined according to the second parameter, so that the finally determined time domain location for receiving the control information may be determined. It is closer to or the same as the first parameter, thereby reducing the number of times the terminal device wakes up, and the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved.
  • the first parameter further includes a third parameter
  • the maximum value of the third parameter is The first period or the fourth parameter determines that the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time
  • the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of the search space of the control information.
  • the terminal device is made to associate the maximum value of the third parameter with the period of the synchronization signal block or the period of the synchronization signal block measurement time or the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information.
  • the time domain locations determined for receiving the control information according to the third parameter are close to each other, providing a new way to increase the flexibility of the terminal device.
  • a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information and the first period
  • the ratio, or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located
  • the time domain position of the synchronization signal block is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located
  • the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  • determining, by the identifier of the terminal device, and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, the control information is a time slot in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and the first parameter includes a synchronization signal block measurement In the case of the position of the frame in which the time is located, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the time domain location is the frame in which the terminal device receives the control information
  • the terminal device may further determine the time slot of the control information in the frame according to the identifier of the terminal device or the index of the synchronization information block.
  • the terminal device can be enabled to accurately receive the control information.
  • the time domain location, the first time domain location, and the offset of the control information meet the following expression:
  • the SFN indicates the system frame number of the time domain location where the control information is located
  • the mod function indicates the modulo operation
  • SFN_1 indicates the first time domain location
  • Num_SFN represents the maximum value of the system frame number or the sum of the maximum value of the system frame number and 1
  • Offset represents the offset
  • T represents the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information
  • UE_ID represents the identity of the terminal device
  • N Min (T, nB)
  • the parameter nB is used for the paging density of the network device
  • the Offset may be a sum including one or more of Offset_UE, Offset_SSB, Offset_SMTC, and Offset_SSBIndex
  • Offset_UE indicates a bias determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  • Offset_SSB represents the offset determined according to the time domain position of the SSB
  • Offset_SMTC represents the offset determined according to the time domain position of the SMTC
  • Offset_SSBIndex represents the offset determined according to the index of the SSB.
  • Offset_UE satisfies the following expression:
  • Offset_UE I*(floor(UE_ID/N)mod E);
  • Offset_UE I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)mod E);
  • Offset_UE indicates an interval between a time domain position where the control information is located and a time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located
  • a floor() function indicates a rounding operation
  • a mod function indicates a modulo operation
  • E Denoting the number of time domain locations for transmitting the control information included in a time domain location range centered on the first parameter
  • Offset_SSBIndex satisfies the following expression:
  • J is an integer and i is an index of the sync block.
  • M and O are configured for the network device, and ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ is the subcarrier spacing used by the physical downlink control channel PDCCH carrying the remaining system information RMSI DCI.
  • Offset_SMTC satisfies the following expression:
  • Offset_SMTC ceil((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B;
  • Offset_SMTC floor((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B;
  • Offset_SMTC SFN_SMTC+L
  • SFN_SMTC is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the synchronization signal block detection time SMTC is located
  • SFN_SMTC is the SFN of the frame in which the first SMTC is located from SFN
  • Offset_SSB satisfies the following expression:
  • Offset_SSB ceil((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B;
  • Offset_SSB floor((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B;
  • Offset_SSB SFN_SSB+L
  • SFN_SSB is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the synchronization signal block SSB is located, or SFN_SSB is the SFN of the frame in which the first SSB is located from SFN 0, or SFN_SSB is the first SSB from SFN 0
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for receiving control information, where a terminal device determines a time slot in which control information is located according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of a synchronization signal block, where the terminal device is in the time slot. Receiving the control information.
  • a method for determining a time slot of control information is proposed, and the terminal device can be based on the synchronization signal block, so that the finally determined time slot for receiving the control information is close to the synchronization signal block. Or the same, so that the terminal device can perform downlink synchronization according to the synchronization signal block before receiving the control information, and after receiving the downlink synchronization, receiving the control information in the time slot, can ensure the effectiveness of synchronization.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, and then in the frame The time slot receives the control information.
  • the terminal device may further determine the frame in which the control information is located according to the identifier of the terminal device and the index of the synchronization signal block, so that the control information can be accurately received.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting control information, where the method includes: first, determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter set, a time domain location where the control information is located before the control information is generated, where And the first parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and then the control information is sent to the terminal device in a time domain location where the control information is located.
  • the first parameter when the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, when the first parameter includes the time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain location where the control information is located and the measurement time of the synchronization signal block are located The interval between time domain locations is determined based on the identity of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the terminal device Monitoring a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, where the first parameter includes the synchronization signal block measurement time In the case of the time domain position, the time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain location after the offset is increased by the first time domain location
  • the first time domain location is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
  • the second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • the synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is;
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes a third parameter
  • the maximum value of the third parameter is The first period or the fourth parameter determines that the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of the search space of the control information.
  • a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information and the first period
  • the ratio, or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located
  • the time domain position of the synchronization signal block is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located
  • the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  • determining, by the identifier of the terminal device, and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, the control information is a time slot in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and the first parameter includes a synchronization signal block measurement In the case of the position of the frame in which the time is located, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for receiving control information, where a network device determines, according to an identifier of a terminal device and/or an index of a synchronization signal block, a time slot in which control information is located, where the network device sends the location in the time slot. Control information.
  • the network device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, in the frame
  • the time slot receives the control information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus includes a processor, and is used to implement the method described in the foregoing first aspect.
  • the communication device can also include a memory for storing program instructions and data.
  • the memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor can invoke and execute program instructions stored in the memory for implementing any of the methods described in the first aspect above.
  • the communication device can also include a communication interface for the communication device to communicate with other devices.
  • the other device is a network device.
  • the communication device includes:
  • a processor configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
  • a memory for storing program instructions
  • a communication interface configured to receive the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located under control of the processor.
  • the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located, and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the synchronization signal block measurement time The interval between the time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the The terminal device monitors a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and the first parameter includes a synchronization signal In the case where the block measurement time is in the time domain position, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain after the offset is increased by the first time domain location a location, wherein the first time domain location is determined by the processor according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is Determined by two parameters;
  • the second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • the synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes a third parameter, a maximum value of the third parameter Determining, according to the first period or the fourth parameter, the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a monitoring opportunity of a search space of the control information Interval.
  • a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information
  • the ratio of the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located
  • the time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located
  • the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus includes a processor, and is configured to implement the method described in the foregoing second aspect.
  • the communication device can also include a memory for storing program instructions and data.
  • the memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor can invoke and execute program instructions stored in the memory for implementing any of the methods described in the second aspect above.
  • the communication device can also include a communication interface for the communication device to communicate with other devices.
  • the other device is a network device.
  • the communication device includes:
  • a processor configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
  • a communication interface configured to receive the control information in the time slot.
  • the processor is configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, where the communication interface is used to The time slot in the frame receives the control information.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus includes a processor, and is used to implement the method described in the foregoing third aspect.
  • the communication device can also include a memory for storing program instructions and data.
  • the memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor can invoke and execute program instructions stored in the memory for implementing any of the methods described in the third aspect above.
  • the communication device can also include a communication interface for the communication device to communicate with other devices.
  • the other device is a terminal device.
  • the communication device includes:
  • a processor configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
  • a memory for storing program instructions
  • a communication interface configured to send the control information to the terminal device in a time domain location where the control information is located under control of the processor.
  • the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located, and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the synchronization signal block measurement time The interval between the time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the The terminal device monitors a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and is included in the first parameter set In the case where the synchronization signal block measures the time domain position in which the time is located, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain after the offset is increased by the first time domain location a location, where the first time domain location is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to a second parameter;
  • the second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • the synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes a third parameter, a maximum value of the third parameter Determining, according to the first period or the fourth parameter, the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a monitoring opportunity of a search space of the control information Interval.
  • a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information
  • the ratio of the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located
  • the time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located
  • the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  • the processor is further configured to:
  • the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus includes a processor, and is used to implement the method described in the foregoing fourth aspect.
  • the communication device can also include a memory for storing program instructions and data.
  • the memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor can invoke and execute program instructions stored in the memory for implementing any of the methods described in the fourth aspect above.
  • the communication device can also include a communication interface for the communication device to communicate with other devices.
  • the other device is a network device.
  • the communication device includes:
  • a processor configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
  • a communication interface configured to send the control information in the time slot.
  • the processor is configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, where the communication interface is used to The time slot in the frame receives the control information.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device, where the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the foregoing first aspect.
  • the terminal device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the foregoing first aspect.
  • a processing module configured to determine a time domain location where the control information is located according to the identifier and the first parameter of the communication device, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located ;
  • a receiving module configured to receive the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located.
  • the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, and a time domain location where the control information is located and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the synchronization signal block measurement time The interval between the time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the The terminal device monitors a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and the first parameter includes a synchronization signal In the case where the block measurement time is in the time domain position, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain after the offset is increased by the first time domain location a location, wherein the first time domain location is determined by the processor according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is Determined by two parameters;
  • the second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • the synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes a third parameter, and a maximum value of the third parameter Determining, according to the first period or the fourth parameter, the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a monitoring opportunity of a search space of the control information Interval.
  • a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information
  • the ratio of the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located.
  • the time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located
  • the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  • the processing module is further configured to:
  • the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device, where the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the foregoing second aspect.
  • the network device in any of the design examples, specifically:
  • a processing module configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
  • a communication module configured to receive the control information in the time slot.
  • the processing module is configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, where the communication module is used The control information is received in the time slot in the frame.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device or a device in a network device, where the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the foregoing third
  • the modules may perform the foregoing third
  • a processing module configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
  • a communication module configured to send the control information to the terminal device at a time domain location where the control information is located.
  • the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located, and the synchronization signal block The interval between the time domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the synchronization signal block measurement The interval between the time domain locations where the time is located is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or Or the terminal device monitors a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, at the first In the case where the parameter set includes the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the time domain position of the control information is after the offset of the first time domain position is increased a time domain location, where the first time domain location is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
  • the second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
  • the synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the first parameter further includes a third parameter, the third parameter The maximum value is determined according to a first period or a fourth parameter, wherein the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a search space of the control information.
  • the timing of monitoring timing is a first period or a fourth parameter, wherein the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a search space of the control information.
  • a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information
  • the ratio of the first period to the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is where the control information is located a position of the frame, a time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, a position of a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located, and a time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is a frame in which the synchronization signal block measurement time is located position.
  • the processing module is further configured to:
  • the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device or a device in a network device, where the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the fourth
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the fourth
  • a processing module configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
  • a communication module configured to send the control information in the time slot.
  • the processing module is configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which control information is located; The control information is received for the time slot in the frame.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable storage medium, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method described in the first aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable storage medium, comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method of the second aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable storage medium, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method described in the third aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable storage medium, comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method described in the fourth aspect.
  • a computer program product including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method described in the first aspect.
  • a computer program product including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method described in the second aspect.
  • a computer program product including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method described in the third aspect.
  • a computer program product including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method described in the fourth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the method described in the first aspect.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the method described in the second aspect.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the method described in the third aspect.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and further includes a memory for implementing the method described in the fourth aspect.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes the communication device of the fifth aspect and the communication device of the ninth aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes the communication device of the sixth aspect and the communication device of the tenth aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes the communication device of the seventh aspect and the communication device of the eleventh aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a system, comprising the communication device according to the eighth aspect, and the communication device according to the twelfth aspect.
  • the communication device is a terminal or a chip, wherein the chip may be disposed at the terminal
  • the chip inside may also be a chip disposed outside the terminal and coupled to the terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a processor, including at least one circuit, for performing the communication methods of the first to fourth aspects and various possible implementation manners thereof.
  • 1A-1B are two paging flowcharts in the prior art
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of a method for sending and receiving control information according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a field and a candidate SSB in which the SSB is located in the embodiment of the present application;
  • 5A-5D are schematic diagrams of a frame used by a network device to send a paging DCI to a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 6A-6C are schematic diagrams of a frame in which an SSB is located and a frame in which a Paging DCI is located in the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of a frame in which an SMTC is located in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of SFN and SFN_1 obtained by determining an offset by the method in (1) in the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of a frame for transmitting control information in the vicinity of a first time domain location in the embodiment of the present application.
  • 8B is a schematic diagram of SFN and SFN_1 obtained by determining an offset by the method in (3) in the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a multiplexing pattern between SSB and RMSI CORESET in the example of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of SFN and SFN_1 obtained by determining an offset by the method in (5) in the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a time slot having more than one time slot for transmitting control information in a frame according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device involved in the embodiment of the present application includes a base station (BS), and the base station may have various forms, such as a macro base station, a micro base station, a relay station, and an access point.
  • the base station involved in the embodiment of the present application may be a base station in the NR, where the base station in the NR may also be referred to as a transmission reception point (TRP) or a gNB, or may be in a GSM or CDMA.
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • gNB gNode BMA
  • the Base Transceiver Station may also be a Node B (NodeB, NB) in the WCDMA system, or may be an Evolution Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in the LTE system, or may be Next generation Node B (gNB) in the future 5G network.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may also include a device that can be wirelessly communicated with the terminal in the wireless access network, for example, in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario.
  • the wireless controller, or the network device may be a relay station, an access point, and a network device in a future 5G network or a network device in a future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN), for example, an evolved node.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the device that implements the function of the network device may be a network device, or may be a device that supports the network device to implement the function, such as a chip, a circuit, or other device.
  • the device that implements the function of the network device is a network device, and the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described.
  • a terminal device which may be referred to as a terminal, may be a device having a wireless transceiver function, which may be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or on-board; It can be deployed on the water (such as ships); it can also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons, satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal device may be a user equipment (UE).
  • the UE includes a handheld device, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, or a computing device having a wireless communication function.
  • the UE can be a mobile phone, a tablet, or a computer with wireless transceiving capabilities.
  • the terminal device may also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in an unmanned vehicle, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, and an intelligent device.
  • the device that implements the function of the terminal may be a terminal, or may be a device that supports the terminal to implement the function, such as a chip, a circuit, or other device.
  • the device that implements the function of the terminal is a terminal, and the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described.
  • the control information may be used to indicate or transmit the downlink or uplink scheduling information, and may be used to schedule a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), for example, And scheduling a physical downlink shared channel for carrying paging messages.
  • the scheduling information may include a frequency domain resource, a time domain resource, a power control command, or a modulation and coding mode.
  • the control information may also be used to indicate that the control information only carries the short message, or to indicate that the control information only carries the scheduling information, or to indicate that the control information carries the short message and the scheduling information, or is used to indicate the short message
  • the short message may be a system information change, a commercial mobile alert service (CMAS) notification, or an earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) notification.
  • CMAS commercial mobile alert service
  • ETWS earthquake and tsunami warning system
  • the control information can also be used to request a channel quality indicator (CQI) report, notify the slot format, and the like.
  • the control information may also be downlink control information (DCI).
  • control information may be a Paging DCI, where the Paging DCI may indicate control information for scheduling a PDSCH carrying a paging message, or control information indicating that the control information only carries a short message, or used to indicate the The control information carries only scheduling information, or control information indicating that the control information carries short messages and scheduling information, or control information for indicating short messages.
  • the Paging DCI may be scrambled using a paging eadio network temporary identifier (P-RNTI).
  • P-RNTI paging eadio network temporary identifier
  • the scrambling DCI may refer to that the DCI performs the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) attachment, and uses the wireless network temporary identifier to scramble the CRC check bit; or may refer to using the RNTI to perform DCI on the DCI.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • a frame which may be a radio frame or a system frame, may be represented by a frame number or a system frame number (SFN).
  • SFN system frame number
  • the terminal device can use discontinuous reception to reduce power consumption.
  • the terminal device monitors a paging occasion during each DRX cycle, and the terminal device may not monitor at the non-paging occasion.
  • a paging occasion can include a plurality of time units in which the paging DCI can be transmitted.
  • the multiple may be two, three or more, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited.
  • a positive integer can be one or more.
  • the embodiments of the present application refer to ordinal numbers such as “first”, “second”, “third”, and “fourth” for distinguishing multiple objects, and are not used to define multiple objects. Order, timing, priority, or importance.
  • FIG. 1A to FIG. 1B the paging process is as follows:
  • a mobility management entity sends a PAGING to the network device
  • EPC evolved packet core
  • the MME sends a PAGING to the network device to initiate a paging process, and the network device receives the PAGING.
  • the network device sends a paging message Paging to the terminal device in a specific time domain location
  • the network device After receiving the PAGING sent by the MME, the network device determines to send the paging frame of the paging message Paging to the terminal device according to the period T of the discontinuous reception (DRX) of the terminal device, the parameter nB, and the identifier UE_ID of the terminal device. (paging frame, PF) and paging occasion (PO) subframes.
  • the value of the parameter nB may be the number of paging occasions in a DRX cycle T.
  • the paging occasion here is not limited to the paging occasion of one terminal device.
  • the mod function represents the modulo operation
  • the div function represents the division operation
  • the network device sends a paging message Paging to the terminal device on the PO of the PF.
  • the terminal device monitors and receives the paging message Paging in a specific time domain location.
  • the terminal device Before monitoring the paging message Paging, the terminal device determines the PF and PO for monitoring the paging message Paging in the same manner as in step a2, and then wakes up in the determined PF in the PO or before the PO, according to the downlink.
  • the CRS in the subframe performs downlink synchronization to obtain downlink timing. After the downlink synchronization is completed, the paging message Paging is monitored and received according to the downlink timing.
  • the PO determined in step a2 indicates that the network device can send a paging message Paging to the terminal device on the PO, and the network device determines, according to the actual situation, whether the paging message Paging needs to be sent on the PO, for example.
  • the network device determines that the paging message Paging needs to be sent to the terminal device on the PO, and the network device may send the paging message Paging on a PO of the terminal device, when there is no
  • the network device may also not send the paging message Paging on a certain PO of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device needs to monitor the paging message Paging on each determined PO, when the network device sends on a certain PO.
  • the paging message Paging the terminal device receives the paging message Paging.
  • the terminal device since the paging message Paging is carried on the PDSCH, the terminal device needs to monitor or receive the paging DCI before monitoring or receiving the paging message, wherein monitoring or receiving the paging DCI and the above monitoring or receiving paging message Paging The process is the same.
  • the paging procedure is initiated by the MME.
  • the paging process can also be initiated by the network device, as shown in FIG. 1B, and the paging process is as follows:
  • the network device sends a paging message Paging to the terminal device in a specific time domain location
  • the network device determines system information, such as a master information block (MIB) or a system information block (SIB), the network device determines to send to the terminal device by using the method in step a2.
  • system information such as a master information block (MIB) or a system information block (SIB)
  • MIB master information block
  • SIB system information block
  • the network device determines to send to the terminal device by using the method in step a2.
  • the time domain location of the paging message is advertised, and then the paging message Paging is sent to the terminal device at the determined time domain location.
  • the terminal device monitors and receives the paging message Paging at a specific time domain location.
  • the terminal device before monitoring or receiving the paging message Paging and/or Paging DCI, the terminal device first performs downlink synchronization according to the CRS. Since the CRS is sent in each downlink subframe, the terminal device only needs to be monitored. Or waking up before receiving the time domain location or time domain location of the paging message Paging and/or Paging DCI, and completing the downlink synchronization by using the CRS in the downlink subframe transmitted near the time domain location and/or the time domain location, The paging message Paging can be monitored or received at the time domain location.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving control information, which are used to send or receive control information.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the NR system, the narrow band internet over things (NB-IoT) system, and can also be applied to the future-oriented communication technology.
  • the system described in the embodiment of the present application is for clearer.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are not limited to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and those skilled in the art may know that the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are similar to the following. Technical issues are equally applicable.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the technical solution provided by the present application is applied to the application scenario shown in FIG. 2, and the network device is included in FIG.
  • a plurality of terminal devices located within the coverage of the network device the network device may send paging messages to the plurality of terminal devices at different time domain locations.
  • a terminal device may perform data transmission with only one network device, and may also perform data transmission with multiple network devices, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of a method for sending and receiving control information according to an embodiment of the present application. The flowchart is described as follows:
  • Step 301 The network device sends synchronization information and parameter information.
  • the network device may be a network device in the NR system or a network device in the NB-IoT system.
  • the network device is a network device in the NR system.
  • it may be gNB.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application is a terminal device in the NR system.
  • the synchronization information and parameter information are described below.
  • the synchronization information is a synchronization signal and a PBCH block (SS/PBCH block).
  • An SS/PBCH block is composed of a primary synchronization signal (PSS), a secondary synchronization signal (SSS), and a physical broadcast channel (PBCH).
  • PSS primary synchronization signal
  • SSS secondary synchronization signal
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block is simply referred to as a synchronization signal block (SSB).
  • the SSB can be used for acquiring the time and frequency synchronization of the cell by the terminal device, detecting the physical layer cell ID, acquiring the system frame number SFN, or acquiring the master information block (MIB).
  • the number of candidate SSBs may be 4, 8, or 64, and the candidate SSBs in each field have respective numbers or indexes.
  • the index of the candidate SSB may be one of 0 to (the number of candidate SSBs in the field is -1).
  • the terminal device may determine an index of the SSB according to a Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) and/or a PBCH load of the PBCH in the SSB.
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • the period of the field in which the SSB is located may be 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, 80 ms, and 160 ms. As shown in FIG. 4, the number of candidate SSBs is 4.
  • the period of the field in which the SSB is located may be configured by the network device.
  • the time domain location of the candidate SSB is determined according to the subcarrier spacing of the SSB, and under the subcarrier spacing of each SSB, there is one or more candidate SSB time domain location patterns.
  • the network device may send a candidate SSB or may not send a certain candidate SSB, and the network device may send indication information for indicating whether to send the candidate SSB.
  • the network device Before sending the SSB, the network device needs to determine the field in which the SSB is located, the period of the field in which the SSB is located, and the time domain position of the candidate SSB in the field in which the SSB is located.
  • the above information can be artificially configured for the network device according to the network plan.
  • the parameter information includes at least one of the following: a period of a field in which the SSB is located, a period of a DRX period, a parameter nB, a period of a synchronization signal/synchronous signal/station measurement block configuration (SMTC,), and a SMTC.
  • the offset the duration of the SMTC.
  • the synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block measurement time configuration is simply referred to as a synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • One or more of the parameter information may be sent in a master information block (MIB) or a system information block (SIB).
  • SIB system information block
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the DRX cycle and the parameter nB may be included in the system information SIB2.
  • the SMTC is used to instruct the terminal device to perform time resources for SSB based measurements.
  • the SSB-based measurement includes at least one of: a synchronization signal reference signal received power (SS-RSRP), a synchronization signal reference signal received quality (SS-RSRQ), and SS signal-to-noise and interference ratio (SS-SINR).
  • the terminal equipment needs to measure the SS-RSRP and SS-RSRQ of the serving cell in each DRX cycle.
  • the terminal device measures the time domain locations of SS-RSRP, SS-RSRQ, and SS-SINR in the SMTC.
  • the SMTC is configured for network devices.
  • the period of the SMTC may be one of 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, 40ms, 80ms, and 160ms; the offset of the SMTC is related to the period of the SMTC, and the offset is 0 to (the period of the SMTC) One of -1), for example, when the period of the SMTC is 5 ms, the offset may be one of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and the offset is 10 ms when the period of the SMTC is 10 ms. The value can be one of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9. When the period of the SMTC is other values, the value of the offset is deduced by analogy.
  • SMTC duration can be one of 1ms, 2ms, 3ms, 4ms, 5ms.
  • the network device can configure the period, offset, and duration of the SMTC according to the actual situation, which is not limited here.
  • the network device can configure the SMTC according to the time domain location sent by the SSB.
  • the network device may configure the SMTC according to the time domain location sent by the SSB in the local cell and/or the time domain location sent by the SSB in the neighboring cell.
  • the network device can configure the value of nB according to the actual situation. There is no restriction here.
  • the network device can configure nB to be 2T, T, T/2, T/4, T/8, T/16, T/32, T. /64, one of T/128 and T/256.
  • the parameter nB is used to indicate the density of the paging message Paging or Paging DCI.
  • Step 302 The terminal device acquires parameter information.
  • the terminal device can acquire the cell time and frequency synchronization through the SSB, and obtain the parameter information sent by the network device.
  • Step 303 The terminal device determines a time domain location where the control information is located.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  • the first parameter may include a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, and does not include a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, or the first parameter may include a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and The time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, or the first parameter may include the time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located and the time domain position where the synchronization signal measurement time is located.
  • the time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located may be the time domain location of the candidate SSB, or the time domain location where the network device sends the SSB, and the time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, that is, the time domain location where the SMTC configured by the network device is located. .
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is the frame where the control information is located, the time domain location where the SSB is located is the frame where the SSB is located, and the time domain location where the SMTC is located is the frame where the SMTC is located;
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is the location of the frame where the control information is located, the time domain location where the SSB is located is the location of the frame where the SSB is located, and the time domain location where the SMTC is located is the location of the frame where the SMTC is located; or, the control information
  • the time domain location is the frame number of the frame where the control information is located, the time domain location where the SSB is located is the frame number of the frame where the SSB is located, and the time domain location where the SMTC is located is the frame number of the frame where the SMTC is located, in the following description.
  • the time domain of the control information is the frame where the control information is located
  • the time domain location where the SSB is located is the frame where the SSB is located
  • the time domain location where the SMTC is located is the frame where the SMTC is located
  • the system frame is used for convenience of description. No. SFN to represent each frame.
  • the network device may determine one or more time domain locations that can be used to send control information to the terminal device, and the network device may select one of the time domain locations to send control information to the terminal device, and the terminal device does not know.
  • the network device actually sends the time domain location of the control information. Therefore, the time domain location of the control information determined by the terminal device is a time domain location of all network device devices that may send control information.
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identification number
  • S-TMSI Server– Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • the step 303 may include, but is not limited to, the following three determining manners, and the terminal device may select one of the manners to determine according to actual conditions. It should be noted that, in any of the following three determination manners, determining the time domain location where the control information is located may be understood as being determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, or may be understood as the first The two determination methods or the third determination manner are one specific implementation manner of the first determination manner.
  • the first parameter includes the frame where the SSB is located.
  • the specific implementation is as follows:
  • the terminal device determines the frame in which the control information is located according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the UE_ID
  • the control information is the Paging DCI.
  • the network device can be configured to send, to the terminal device, the frame where the paging DCI is located as one frame or multiple frames in the frame where the SSB is located, as shown in FIG. 5A, or the network device can be used to the terminal.
  • the frame in which the device sends the Paging DCI is one or more frames in the frame within the preset offset position of the frame in which the SSB is located.
  • the preset offset position may be 1 frame, as shown in FIG. 5B. Of course, the preset offset position may also be 2 frames or the like, which is not limited herein.
  • a plurality of terminal devices exist in the coverage of the network device, and the network device may be configured to send different frames of the paging DCI to different terminal devices.
  • the terminal device determines the frame in which the paging DCI is located according to the UE_ID. For example, in a plurality of frames for transmitting a paging DCI as shown in FIG. 5A, the first frame is used by the network device to send a Paging DCI to a terminal device with UE_IDs of 0, 4, 8, and the second frame is used for The network device sends a Paging DCI to the terminal device with UE_ID 1, 5, 9, and so on. If the UE_ID of the terminal device is 5, the terminal device determines that the SFN of the frame in which the paging DCI is located is 5.
  • the interval between the frame where the Paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located may also be 0. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the frame where the Paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located. The value of the interval between them is not limited.
  • the first parameter includes the frame in which the SMTC is located
  • the method for determining the frame of the paging DCI according to the frame in which the SMTC is located is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first parameter includes the frame where the SMTC is located
  • the frame where the SSB is located is located in the frame where the SMTC is located.
  • the second method is as follows:
  • the first parameter includes the frame where the SSB is located.
  • the specific implementation is as follows:
  • the interval between the time domain location where the control information is located and the time domain location where the SSB is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the UE_ID
  • the control information is the Paging DCI.
  • the network device can be configured to send, to the terminal device, the frame where the paging DCI is located as one frame or multiple frames in the frame where the SSB is located, as shown in FIG. 5C, or the network device can be used to the terminal.
  • the frame in which the device sends the Paging DCI is one or more frames in the frame within the preset offset position of the frame in which the SSB is located.
  • the preset offset position may be 1 frame, as shown in FIG. 5D. Of course, the preset offset position may also be 2 frames or the like, which is not limited herein.
  • a plurality of terminal devices exist in the coverage of the network device, and the network device can be used to send different frames of the paging DCI to different terminal devices.
  • the terminal device determines the interval between the frame where the paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located according to the UE_ID. For example, in the frame where multiple paging DCIs are located as shown in FIG. 5C, the interval between the first frame and the frame where the SSB is located is 0, and the first frame is used for the terminal of the network device to UE_ID 0, 4.
  • the device sends a Paging DCI.
  • the interval between the second frame and the frame where the SSB is located is 2 frames.
  • the second frame is used by the network device to send the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, and so on. If the UE_ID of the terminal device is 6, the terminal device determines that the interval between the frame where the paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located is 2 frames, so that the terminal device determines that the frame of the paging DCI is the second frame in FIG. 5C.
  • the interval between the frame where the Paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located may also be 0. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the frame where the Paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located. The value of the interval between them is not limited.
  • the first parameter includes the frame in which the SMTC is located
  • the method for determining the frame of the paging DCI according to the frame in which the SMTC is located is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first parameter includes the frame where the SMTC is located
  • the frame where the SSB is located is located in the frame where the SMTC is located.
  • the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or a period of the terminal device monitoring control information.
  • the first synchronization signal block is a synchronization signal block sent by the network device, or the first synchronization signal block is a synchronization signal block that is monitored or received by the terminal device.
  • the first parameter includes the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located may be within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  • the first parameter includes multiple parameters, that is, the first parameter is a parameter set.
  • the period of monitoring the control information of the terminal device will be described below.
  • the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information may be marked as T, where T may be a discontinuous reception period DRX cycle of the terminal device, where T may be configured by the network device or determined by the terminal device.
  • T may be a discontinuous reception period DRX cycle of the terminal device, where T may be configured by the network device or determined by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device reports the period of monitoring or receiving the paging message determined by the terminal device to the network device during the RRC connection process, and the T may be determined according to the value of the network device configuration and the value determined by the terminal device.
  • determining the time domain location where the control information is located may include, but is not limited to, the following two implementation manners:
  • the first parameter includes the time domain location where the SSB is located and the index of the SSB.
  • the identifier of the terminal device is the UE_ID
  • the control information is the Paging DCI.
  • the network device can be used to send the frame where the paging DCI is located to the terminal device as one frame or multiple frames in the frame where the SSB is located, as shown in FIG. 5A or FIG. 5B, and details are not described herein again.
  • the network device in the coverage of the network device, there are multiple terminal devices, and the network device can be used to send different frames of the paging DCI to different terminal devices, that is, when the UE_ID of the terminal device is When the index of the SSB is different, the network device sends a different frame to the terminal device where the paging DCI is located. For example, in a frame for transmitting a paging DCI as shown in FIG.
  • the first frame is used to send a Paging DCI to a terminal device with a UE_ID of 0, 4, when The index of the SSB is n 1 , and the second frame is used to send the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 0, 4; when the index of the SSB is n 0 , the third frame is used for the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6.
  • the Paging DCI is sent.
  • the fourth frame is used to send the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, and so on. If the index of the SSB is n 0 and the UE_ID of the terminal device is 6, the terminal device determines that the frame of the paging DCI is the third frame in FIG. 5C.
  • the first parameter includes other parameters, for example, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the SSB is located and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, or the first parameter includes a time domain location where the SSB is located, and an index of the SSB.
  • the terminal device monitors the period of the control information the method for determining the time domain location of the control information by the terminal device is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again.
  • the method for determining the frame of the paging DCI according to the frame in which the SMTC is located is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again.
  • the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain location after the offset is increased by the first time domain location, where the first time domain location is based on the identifier of the terminal device and the terminal device monitoring control information.
  • the period determined by the period is determined according to the second parameter, wherein the second parameter comprises at least one of the following parameters:
  • the identification of the terminal device is the identification of the terminal device.
  • the units of the first time domain position and the offset may be all frames.
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device, the control information is the paging DCI, and the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information is T is taken as an example for description.
  • the first time domain location is a frame with the frame number SFN_1, and the specific determination method is as follows:
  • the terminal device determines that the specific calculation method of the first time domain location SFN_1 satisfies the following expression according to the period in which the terminal device monitors the paging DCI and the identifier UE_ID of the terminal device:
  • the first parameter further includes a third parameter
  • the third parameter is taken as the parameter nB as an example.
  • the maximum value of the parameter nB is determined according to the first period or the fourth parameter, where the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is The interval at which the monitoring space of the control information is monitored.
  • the first parameter includes a time domain location where the SSB is located, and the maximum value of the third parameter is determined according to a period of the SSB or a fourth parameter; the first parameter includes a time domain location where the SMTC is located, and the maximum value of the third parameter is according to the SMTC. The period or the fourth parameter is determined.
  • the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information may also be referred to as the period of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information, and the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information may be configured by the network device. It can also be pre-defined. For example, the interval may be fixed to be 20 ms or may be equal to the period of the SSB.
  • the frame in which the Paging DCI determined by the formula (1) is located may be close to the first period or the fourth parameter, so that the terminal device may need to be long after performing downlink synchronization according to the SSB.
  • the Paging DCI can be received in time to reduce the effectiveness of the downlink synchronization, which can improve the effectiveness of the downlink synchronization of the terminal device through the SSB when receiving the paging DCI.
  • the first parameter includes the time domain location where the SSB is located, and the maximum value of the parameter nB is determined according to the period of the SSB or the fourth parameter, and the maximum value of the parameter nB is described:
  • the maximum value of nB is a ratio of the period T of the terminal device monitoring the control information to the period of the SSB, that is, the maximum value of nB is T/(the period of the SSB).
  • the unit of the period of the SSB is the same as the period of the period T unit in which the terminal device monitors the control information.
  • the unit of the period of the SSB is a frame.
  • the maximum value of nB is a ratio of the period T of the terminal device monitoring the control information to the fourth parameter, that is, the maximum value of nB is T/(fourth parameter).
  • the unit of the fourth parameter is the same as the period of the period T unit in which the terminal device monitors the control information.
  • the unit of the fourth parameter is a frame.
  • the maximum value of nB is the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the T/Paging DCI;
  • the maximum value of nB is T/(the period of the SSB) or the interval of the monitoring timing of the search space of the T/Paging DCI.
  • the value of the parameter nB of the network device configuration is not more than a value of the maximum value of the nB determined in the foregoing, for example, the value of nB is T or T/8. .
  • the period of the frame in which the paging DCI is located is greater than or equal to the period of the SSB. Therefore, the frame in which the paging DCI is located is close to the frame in which the SSB is located.
  • the network device sends a Paging to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 0, 32, 64, .
  • the SFN is SFN 0; when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 1, 33, 65, ..., the SFN is SFN 1; the network device sends the Paging to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 34, 66, ...
  • SFN is SFN 2, and so on.
  • the network device sends the frame where the paging DCI is located to the terminal device and is close to the frame where the SSB is located.
  • the minimum value of T/N is max (the period of the SSB, 1 frame), so that it can be concluded that the period in which the network device sends the frame in which the paging DCI is located to the terminal device is greater than or equal to the SSB. As shown in FIG.
  • the network device sends to the terminal device with UE_ID 0, 4, 8, .
  • SFN is SFN 0, 32, ...;
  • the network device sends Paging DCI to the terminal device with UE_ID 1, 5, 9, ..., SFN is SFN 8, 40, ...;
  • network device to UE_ID is 2, 6
  • the terminal device of 10 ... sends the Paging DCI, the SFN is SFN 16, 48, ..., and so on.
  • the interval between the frame in which the network device sends the paging DCI and the frame in which the SSB is located is about half of the period of the SSB, and the network device sends the frame where the paging DCI is located and the SSB to the terminal device.
  • the frames are close.
  • the maximum value is the interval of the monitoring time of the search space of the T/Paging DCI.
  • the SFN is SFN 0; when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 1, 17, 33, ..., the SFN is SFN 2;
  • the SFN is SFN 4
  • the network device sends the frame where the paging DCI is located to the terminal device and is close to the frame where the SSB is located.
  • the minimum value is max (the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the paging DCI, 1 frame), so that the period in which the network device sends the frame in which the paging DCI is located to the terminal device is greater than or equal to the SSB period.
  • the maximum value of the parameter nB is related to the period of the SSB or related to the fourth parameter, and can be determined according to the size of the period of the SSB. For example, when the period of the SSB is greater than or equal to a certain threshold, the maximum value of the parameter nB is related to the period of the SSB. When the period of the SSB is less than the threshold, the maximum value of the parameter nB is related to the fourth parameter, and the value of the threshold is There are no restrictions here.
  • the terminal device determines that the frame where the control information is located is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again.
  • the manner of determining the offset is different according to different parameters for determining the offset, as follows.
  • the offset determined according to the frame in which the SMTC is located is marked as Offset_SMTC.
  • the manner of determining the Offset_SMTC according to the frame in which the SMTC is located includes but is not limited to the following.
  • the terminal device determines that the calculation method of Offset_SMTC according to the frame in which the SMTC is located satisfies the following expression:
  • the SFN_SMTC is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the SMTC is located, or SFN_SMTC is the SFN of the frame in which the first SMTC is located from SFN 0, or SFN_SMTC is the frame distance of the first SMTC from SFN 0
  • L is an integer and can be 0, or a positive integer, or a negative integer, or an odd number, or an even number.
  • L can be determined in various ways.
  • L may be pre-defined, or may be pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal device, may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the network device according to other parameters, for example,
  • the interval of the monitoring timing of the search space of the control information is determined, and L can also be determined according to a calculation method that satisfies the following expression:
  • A, B and C are integers.
  • the value of A may be 2
  • the value of B may be 1
  • the value of C may be -1
  • L can also adopt other determination methods, and is not limited herein.
  • L can adjust the interval between the frame in which the Paging DCI is located and the frame in which the SMTC is located.
  • the terminal device determines that the calculation method of Offset_SMTC according to the frame in which the SMTC is located satisfies the following expression:
  • Offset_SMTC floor((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B; (4)
  • the SFN_SMTC is the same as the first one, and is not described here.
  • B is a positive integer, and B is determined in various ways.
  • B may be pre-defined, or may be pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal device, may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the network device.
  • Other parameters for example, the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information, for example, the value of B is equal to the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the Paging DCI, and the unit is a frame.
  • L is an integer and can be 0, or a positive integer, or a negative integer, or an odd number, or an even number. L may be pre-defined, or may be pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal device, or may be configured by the network device, and may be determined in other manners, and is not limited herein.
  • the value of B is 2
  • the value of L is 1
  • the terminal device determines that the calculation method of Offset_SMTC according to the frame in which the SMTC is located satisfies the following expression:
  • Offset_SMTC ceil((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B; (5)
  • the SFN_SMTC is the same as the first one, and the values of B and L are the same as those in the second type, and are not described here.
  • the ceil() function is a rounded up function.
  • Offset_SMTC is the frame number of the frame in which the monitoring space of the search space of the Lth control information after the frame in which the first SMTC is located, or determining that Offset_SMTC is the L before the frame in which the first SMTC is located
  • the frame in which the first SMTC is located may also be understood as the smallest SMTC of the frame number of the frame in which the SMTC is located.
  • L is 0 or a positive integer, and L may be pre-defined, or may be pre-agreed by the network device or the terminal device, or may be configured by the network device, and is not limited herein.
  • the time domain location where the Paging DCI is located is determined to be the first time domain location plus the time domain location of the offset Offset_SMTC according to the first time domain location and the offset Offset_SMTC.
  • the SFN_1 is calculated according to the formula (1), and the network device is obtained with the UE_ID being 0.
  • the terminal device of 4 8 ... sends the Paging DCI
  • SFN_1 is SFN 0, 32, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 1, 5, 9, ..., SFN_1 is SFN 8, 40,...
  • the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, ..., SFN_1 is SFN 16, 48, ..., and so on. It can be seen from the frame in which the Paging DCI is transmitted on the second time axis in FIG. 7B that the distance between the SFN_1 and the frame where the SMTC is located is calculated by the formula (1).
  • Offset_SMTC SFN_SMTC+L
  • SFN (SFN_1+Offset_SMTC) mod Num_SFN
  • the SFN is SFN 4, 36, ...
  • the network device has a UE_ID of 1
  • the terminal device of 5 9, ... sends the Paging DCI
  • the SFN is SFN 12, 44, ...
  • the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, ...
  • the SFN is SFN 20, 52, ..., and so on.
  • the terminal device can complete the SS-RSRP and SS-RSRQ measurement in the frame in which the SMTC is located, and the monitoring and/or receiving process of the Paging DCI in a wake-up process.
  • the process of determining the offset according to the frame in which the SSB is located is the same as the offset determined according to the frame in which the SMTC is located in (1), where SFN_SMTC is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the SSB is located, or SFN_SMTC is the slave SFN 0. Start the SFN of the frame where the first SSB is located, or SFN_SMTC is the offset value of the frame distance SFN 0 where the first SSB is located from SFN 0, and the offset value is in units of frames.
  • Offset_SMTC is the frame number of the frame in which the monitoring time of the search space of the Lth control information after the frame in which the first SSB is located, or before determining that Offset_SMTC is the frame in which the first SSB is located
  • the frame in which the first SSB is located may also be understood as the smallest SSB of the frame number of the frame in which the SSB is located. I will not repeat them here.
  • the offset determined according to the UE_ID of the terminal device is marked as Offset_UE.
  • the manner of determining Offset_UE according to the UE_ID of the terminal device includes but is not limited to the following manners:
  • the calculation method of the terminal device determining the Offset_UE according to the UE_ID of the terminal device satisfies the following expression:
  • Offset_UE I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)modE); (6)
  • E is the number of frames used to send control information in the vicinity of the first time domain location. If the first time domain location is determined by the network device according to the frame in which the SSB is located, then E is used near the frame where the SSB is located. The number of frames in which control information is sent. E, G, and I can be pre-defined or network device configured. I is the interval of the monitoring timing of the search space for the control information. The network device can set the values of E and I according to the actual situation. For example, if the network device can set the value of E to 2 and the value of I to 2, there are 2 for sending control in the vicinity of the first time domain location. The frame of information, one frame is the first time domain position, and the other frame is the frame after 2 frames from the first time domain position, as shown in FIG. 8A. It should be noted that the value of Offset_UE may be 0.
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain location where the paging DCI is located is the first time domain location plus the time domain location of the offset Offset_UE according to the first time domain location and the offset Offset_UE.
  • SFN_1 is calculated according to formula (1), and the terminal of the network device to UE_ID is 1, 5, 9, ... is obtained.
  • SFN_1 is SFN 8.
  • the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, ..., SFN_1 is SFN 16, and so on.
  • Offset_UE 2*(floor(UE_ID/N/G) mod E)
  • the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 0, 8, 16, ..., the SFN is SFN 0, 32, ..., the network device
  • the SFN is SFN 2, 34, ..., and when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 1, 9, 17, ..., the SFN is SFN 8, 40, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 5, 13, 21, ..., the SFN is SFN 10, 42, ..., and the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 10, 18...
  • the SFN is SFN 16, 48, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 6, 14, 22..., the SFN is SFN 18, 50, ..., and so on.
  • the index of the SSB is marked as SSBIndex
  • the offset determined according to the index of the SSB is marked as Offset_SSBIndex.
  • the frame used by the network device to send the paging DCI may be associated with the index of the SSB, or may not be associated with the index of the SSB, and the frame used by the network device to send the paging DCI is associated with the index of the SSB.
  • the index of the SSB is associated with the frame used by the network device to send the Paging DCI
  • the index of the SSB is the same as the association of the frame used by the network device to transmit the remaining minimum system information (RMSI) DCI.
  • RMSI remaining minimum system information
  • SSB and RMSI control resource set are multiplexed with three patterns, as shown in Figure 9, in the first multiplexing relationship in Figure 9, ie, pattern 1, RMSI DCI
  • the monitoring time of the search space is 20 ms; in pattern 2/3, the monitoring time of the search space of the RMSI DCI is the same as the period of the SSB.
  • the monitoring timing of the search space of the RMSI DCI is associated with the index of the SSB.
  • the terminal device can monitor the RMSI DCI in two consecutive slots. The starting slot index of the two slots is n 0 .
  • the terminal device determines that the n 0 calculation method in one radio frame SFN C satisfies the following expression:
  • radio frame SFN C satisfies the following expression:
  • M and O are configured for the network device, and ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ is a subcarrier spacing used by a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) carrying the RMSI DCI, Represents the number of slots in a frame whose value is defined in the standard protocol. It can be seen that the frame in which the network device sends the paging DCI is related to the index of the SSB.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the calculation method for determining the offset according to the index of the SSB satisfies one of the following expressions, wherein the index of the SSB is SSBIndex, and the offset determined according to the index of the SSB is Offset_SSBIndex.
  • the index of the SSB is SSBIndex
  • the offset determined according to the index of the SSB is Offset_SSBIndex.
  • J is an integer and can be 0, or a positive integer, or a negative integer.
  • Offset_SSBIndex may be 0.
  • the SSB and RMSI CORESET multiplexing pattern is pattern2 or pattern3, Offset_SSBIndex is 0.
  • the terminal device determines that the time domain location where the paging DCI is located is the first time domain location plus the time domain location of the offset Offset_SSBIndex according to the first time domain location and the offset Offset_SSBIndex.
  • the offset is determined according to at least two parameters of the frame in which the SSB is located, the frame in which the SMTC is located, the index of the SSB, and the UE_ID of the terminal device.
  • Offset_SMTC Offset_UE
  • Offset_SSBIndex Offset_SSBIndex
  • the offset determined according to at least two parameters of the frame where the SSB is located, the frame where the SMTC is located, the index of the SSB, and the UE_ID of the terminal device is recorded as Offset, and the terminal device is based on the first time domain position and the offset Offset.
  • SFN (SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN
  • SFN_1 is SFN8, 40, ...
  • the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, ...
  • SFN_1 is SFN 16, 48, ..., and so on. It can be seen from the frame in which the Paging DCI is transmitted on the second time axis in FIG. 10 that the distance between the SFN_1 and the frame where the SMTC is located is calculated by the formula (1).
  • Offset_SMTC SFN_SMTC+L
  • Offset_UE I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G) modE)
  • the network device has a UE_ID of 1 When the terminal device of 9, 17, ...
  • SFN (SFN_LTE + Offset_SMTC + Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN is SFN 12, 44, ..., and the network device sends Paging to the terminal device with UE_ID of 5, 13, 21, ...
  • a plurality of frames for transmitting the paging DCI may be set, thereby reducing the number of paging devices in each frame. Reduce the computational complexity of network devices.
  • determining the frame number SFN of the frame for transmitting the control information may further satisfy the following One of the expressions:
  • SFN (SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE);
  • SFN (SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_SSBIndex);
  • SFN (SFN_1+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex);
  • SFN (SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex);
  • SFN (SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex).
  • Step 304 The terminal device determines a time slot in which the control information is located.
  • the network device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or the index of the SSB, the time slot in which the control information is in the frame in which the control information is located.
  • the identification of the terminal device is the UE_ID of the terminal device
  • the control information is the Paging DCI as an example.
  • time slot for transmitting control information in one frame there are two time slots for transmitting the paging DCI in one frame, and then it is determined according to the UE_ID of the terminal device for sending Paging.
  • F is a positive integer, F can be predefined, or it can be configured by a network device.
  • F in the frame for determining to send the control information, if Offset_UE is not used, F may be equal to 1.
  • the number of timeslots used to send the Paging DCI in a frame may be configured by the network device, or may be pre-agreed with the terminal device, and is not limited herein.
  • the implementation manner of determining, by the terminal device, the time slot of the control information in the frame in which the control information is located may include, but is not limited to, the following multiple manners:
  • the terminal device may determine the time slot used by the network device to send the paging DCI by using formula (7).
  • (7) has been described in (4) in step 303, and will not be described again.
  • the network device may send the Paging DCI in one time slot, or may send the Paging DCI in one of two or more consecutive time slots.
  • the network device is sent in one time slot, and the index determined by the terminal device according to formula (7) is an index of the time slot. If the network device sends in one of two or more consecutive time slots, the terminal The index determined by the device according to equation (7) is the index of the starting time slot of the two or more consecutive time slots.
  • the terminal device may monitor the paging DCI in one time slot, and may also monitor the paging DCI in two or more consecutive time slots, if the terminal device is at one time In the gap monitoring, the index determined according to formula (7) is the index of the time slot. If the terminal device monitors in two or more consecutive time slots, the index determined according to formula (7) is the two or An index of the starting time slot of a plurality of consecutive time slots.
  • the multiplexing pattern of the resources in the SSB and the RMSI CORESET is pattern1, it can be determined in the first manner.
  • the terminal device determines the time slot of the paging DCI according to the slot number of the SSB indexed i in the frame in which it is located. Specifically, the terminal device determines that in a frame for transmitting the paging DCI, the slot index n 0 of the paging DCI is the sum of the slot number and K in the frame in which the SSB indexed i is located, where K For an integer, K can be 0, can be a positive integer, and can be a negative integer.
  • K can be a positive integer
  • K can be a negative integer.
  • the slot index n 0 of the paging device DCI in the PF is the slot number of the SSB in which the second index is i in the PF.
  • Step 305 The network device determines a time domain location where the control information is located.
  • Step 306 The network device determines a time slot in which the control information is located.
  • the network device determines that the time domain location of the control information is a time domain location of the network device that can be used to send control information to the terminal device. Therefore, the network device determines the time domain location and time slot of the control information.
  • the method is the same as that of the terminal device, that is, the step 305 is the same as the step 303, and the step 306 is the same as the step 304, and details are not described herein again.
  • step 303-step 306 is not limited, that is, step 305-step 306 may be performed first, then step 303-step 304 may be performed, or step 303-step 306 may be performed simultaneously. Or step 304 is performed first, then step 303 is executed, step 306 is performed again, step 305 is performed last, or step 305 is performed first, then step 303 is performed, step 304 is performed, and step 306 is finally executed. . Steps 303 to 306 are sequentially performed in FIG. 3 as an example.
  • Step 307 The terminal device monitors the control information.
  • the control information is monitored at the time domain location where the determined control information is located according to the period T of the terminal device monitoring control information, or, in the determined control The time domain location where the information is located and the monitoring control information in the time slot.
  • Step 308 The network device sends control information, and the terminal device receives the control information.
  • the control information is sent in the time domain location according to actual needs. For example, when the network device needs to send data to the terminal device in the idle state, or the system information changes, the network device sends the Paging DCI at the time domain location. Specifically, the network device can determine one or more time domain locations that can be used to send control information to the terminal device, and the network device can select one of the time domain locations to send control information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device monitors the period T of the control information according to the terminal device. Monitoring, therefore, the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information may be different from the period in which the terminal device receives the control information.
  • the network device sends the control information in the period T of each monitoring control information of the terminal device, the terminal device monitors the control information. The period is the same as the period in which the terminal device receives the control information.
  • the network device or the terminal device determines the time domain location for transmitting or receiving the control information according to the time domain position where the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and realizes the reception control without the CRS.
  • Information, and the time domain position for transmitting or receiving the control information determined in this manner is close to or the same as the time domain position of the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time, so that the terminal device receives the control information before receiving the control information
  • the downlink synchronization may be performed according to the synchronization signal block. After the downlink synchronization is completed, the control information is received at the time domain location, which can ensure the effectiveness of the synchronization.
  • the terminal device can complete the process according to the synchronization signal block during the wake-up process.
  • the cell measurement and receiving the control information can save power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced from the perspective of interaction between the network device, the terminal device, and the network device and the terminal device.
  • the network device and the terminal device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module, and implement the foregoing functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • One of the above functions is performed in a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module, depending on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1200.
  • the communication device 1200 can be a terminal device, and can implement the function of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1200 can also be a device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1200 can be a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • Communication device 1200 can be implemented by a chip system. In the embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, and may also include a chip and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device 1200 can include a processing module 1201 and a communication module 1202.
  • the processing module 1201 may be configured to perform step 303, step 304, and step 307 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, or to perform step 304 and step 307 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and/or to support Other processes of the techniques described herein.
  • Communication module 1202 is for communication device 1200 to communicate with other modules, which may be circuits, devices, interfaces, buses, software modules, transceivers, or any other device that can implement communication.
  • Communication module 1202 can be used to perform steps 302 and 308 in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 3, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1300.
  • the communication device 1300 can be a network device, and can implement the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1300 can also be a device that can support the terminal device to implement the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1300 can be a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • Communication device 1300 can be implemented by a chip system. In the embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, and may also include a chip and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device 1300 can include a processing module 1301 and a communication module 1302.
  • the processing module 1301 can be used to perform steps 305 and 306 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, or to perform step 306 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and/or to support the techniques described herein. Other processes.
  • the communication module 1301 is used by the communication device 1300 to communicate with other modules, which may be circuits, devices, interfaces, buses, software modules, transceivers, or any other device that can implement communication.
  • Communication module 1302 can be used to perform steps 301 and 308 in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 3, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • each functional module in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing. In the device, it can also be physically existed alone, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules.
  • the communication device 1400 is provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1400 can be the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , and can implement the function of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • the communication device 1400 may also be a device that can support the terminal device to implement the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1400 can be a chip system. In the embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, and may also include a chip and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device 1400 includes at least one processor 1420 for implementing or for supporting the communication device 1400 to implement the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 1420 may determine the time domain location where the control information is located and/or the time slot in which the control information is located. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, and no further details are provided herein.
  • Communication device 1400 can also include at least one memory 1430 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • Memory 1430 is coupled to processor 1420.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form for information interaction between devices, units or modules.
  • Processor 1420 may operate in conjunction with memory 1430.
  • Processor 1420 may execute program instructions stored in memory 1430. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in a processor.
  • the communication device 1400 can also include a communication interface 1410 for communicating with other devices through the transmission medium such that the devices for use in the communication device 1400 can communicate with other devices.
  • the other device may be a network device.
  • the processor 1420 can transmit and receive data using the communication interface 1410.
  • connection medium between the communication interface 1410, the processor 1420, and the memory 1430 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1430, the processor 1420, and the communication interface 1410 are connected by a bus 1440 in FIG. 14.
  • the bus is indicated by a thick line in FIG. 14, and the connection manner between other components is only schematically illustrated. , not limited to.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one thick line is shown in Figure 14, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 1420 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or a transistor logic device, and a discrete hardware component. Or the methods, steps, and logic blocks disclosed in the embodiments of the present application are executed.
  • a general purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory 1430 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), or a volatile memory.
  • a non-volatile memory such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), or a volatile memory.
  • RAM random access memory
  • a memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of an instruction or data structure and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the communication device 1500 is provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1500 can be a network device, and can implement the functions of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1500 can also support the core.
  • the network element implements the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1500 can be a chip system. In the embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, and may also include a chip and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device 1500 includes at least one processor 1520 for implementing or for supporting the communication device 1500 to implement the functions of the core network element in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 1520 may determine the time domain location where the control information is located and/or the time slot in which the control information is located. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, and no further details are provided herein.
  • Communication device 1500 can also include at least one memory 1530 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • Memory 1530 is coupled to processor 1520.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form for information interaction between devices, units or modules.
  • Processor 1520 may operate in conjunction with memory 1530.
  • Processor 1520 may execute program instructions stored in memory 1530. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in a processor.
  • the communication device 1500 can also include a communication interface 1510 for communicating with other devices over a transmission medium such that devices for use in the device 1500 can communicate with other devices.
  • the other device may be a terminal device.
  • the processor 1520 can transmit and receive data using the communication interface 1510.
  • connection medium between the communication interface 1510, the processor 1520, and the memory 1530 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1530, the processor 1520, and the communication interface 1510 are connected by a bus 1540 in FIG. 15, and the bus is indicated by a thick line in FIG. 15, and the connection manner between other components is only schematically illustrated. , not limited to.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one thick line is shown in Figure 15, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 1520 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or a transistor logic device, and a discrete hardware component. Or the methods, steps, and logic blocks disclosed in the embodiments of the present application are executed.
  • a general purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory 1530 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), or a volatile memory.
  • a non-volatile memory such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), or a volatile memory.
  • RAM random access memory
  • a memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of an instruction or data structure and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • a computer readable storage medium including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method performed by the terminal device in any of the embodiments of FIG.
  • a computer readable storage medium including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method performed by the network device in any of the embodiments of FIG.
  • Also provided in the embodiment of the present application is a computer program product, comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method performed by the terminal device in any one of the embodiments of FIG.
  • Also provided in the embodiment of the present application is a computer program product, comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method performed by the network device in any one of the embodiments of FIG.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the functions of the network device in the foregoing method.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes the foregoing terminal device and the network device.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user device, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the available media can be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, Magnetic tape), optical medium (for example, digital video disc (DVD)), or semiconductor medium (for example, SSD).

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A control information receiving method and a communication apparatus, used for receiving control information. The method comprises: a terminal device determines a time domain location where control information is located according to the identifier of the terminal device and a first parameter, the first parameter comprising a time domain location where a synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where a synchronization signal block measurement time is located; the terminal device monitors and receives the control information at the time domain location where the control information is located.

Description

一种控制信息的接收方法及通信装置Method for receiving control information and communication device 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种控制信息的接收方法及通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method and a communication device for receiving control information.
背景技术Background technique
为了节省终端设备的能耗,在移动通信系统中,例如,长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统,采用寻呼技术,即在终端设备没有数据需要发送或接收时,可以关闭其射频调制解调器,当终端设备需要发送或接收数据时,则通过网络设备发送的寻呼消息唤醒其射频调制解调器,进行数据的发送或接收。In order to save energy consumption of the terminal device, in a mobile communication system, for example, a long term evolution (LTE) system, a paging technology is adopted, that is, when the terminal device has no data to transmit or receive, the radio frequency modem can be turned off. When the terminal device needs to send or receive data, the paging message sent by the network device wakes up its radio modem to transmit or receive data.
在LTE系统中,寻呼流程为:网络设备在确定好的时域位置向终端设备发送寻呼消息,终端设备在该确定好的时域位置醒来,首先根据下行子帧中的小区特定参考信号(cell-specific reference signals,CRS)进行下行同步,再完成下行同步之后,则根据同步后的系统信息接收该寻呼消息,完成寻呼流程。In the LTE system, the paging process is: the network device sends a paging message to the terminal device in the determined time domain location, and the terminal device wakes up in the determined time domain location, first according to the cell specific reference in the downlink subframe. The cell-specific reference signals (CRS) are downlink synchronized, and after the downlink synchronization is completed, the paging message is received according to the synchronized system information, and the paging process is completed.
而在新无线(new radio,NR)系统中,下行子帧中没有CRS,因此,LTE系统的这种寻呼流程不适用于类似于NR系统的这种没有CRS的系统。In the new radio (NR) system, there is no CRS in the downlink subframe. Therefore, this paging procedure of the LTE system is not applicable to such a system without CRS similar to the NR system.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种控制信息的接收方法及通信装置,用以接收控制信息。The embodiment of the present application provides a method for receiving control information and a communication device for receiving control information.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种控制信息的接收方法,该方法包括:终端设备在接收控制信息之前,首先根据终端设备的标识和第一参数集合确定该控制信息所在的时域位置,其中,该第一参数集合包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,然后,在该控制信息所在的时域位置内接收该控制信息。In a first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a method for receiving control information, where the method includes: first, before receiving the control information, the terminal device first determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter set, a time domain location where the control information is located, The first parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and then receives the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located.
在上述技术方案中,终端设备根据同步信号块或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置确定用于接收控制信息的时域位置,实现了在没有CRS的情况下,接收控制信息,且,采用这种方式确定的接收控制信息的时域位置,与同步信号块或同步信号块测量时间的时域位置相接近或相同,从而终端设备在接收该控制信息之前,可以先根据同步信号块进行下行同步,完成下行同步后,在该时域位置上接收该控制信息,可以保证提高同步的有效性。In the foregoing technical solution, the terminal device determines a time domain location for receiving control information according to a time domain location where the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and implements receiving control information without CRS, and adopts The time domain position of the received control information determined in this manner is close to or the same as the time domain position of the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time, so that the terminal device can perform downlink according to the synchronization signal block before receiving the control information. Synchronization, after completing the downlink synchronization, receiving the control information at the time domain location can ensure the effectiveness of the synchronization.
进一步,由于终端设备接收该控制信息的时域位置与同步信号块或同步信号块测量时间的时域位置相接近或相同,这样,终端设备可以一次醒来的过程中,完成根据同步信号块进行小区测量以及接收该控制信息,可以节省终端设备的功耗。Further, since the time domain position of the terminal device receiving the control information is close to or the same as the time domain position of the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time, the terminal device can complete the process according to the synchronization signal block during the wake-up process. The cell measurement and receiving the control information can save power consumption of the terminal device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置时,该控制信息所在的时域位置与该同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据该终端设备的标识确定;或,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所 在的时域位置时,该控制信息所在的时域位置与该同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据该终端设备的标识确定。With reference to the first aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, when the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, when the first parameter includes the time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain location where the control information is located and the measurement time of the synchronization signal block are located The interval between time domain locations is determined based on the identity of the terminal device.
在上述技术方案中,在同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置附近有多个用于接收该控制信息的时域位置,则可以根据终端设备的标识将终端设备进行分组,不同的分组对应多个用于接收该控制信息的时域位置中的其中一个时域位置,从而可以减少在一个时域位置中寻呼的终端设备的数量,降低网络设备的运算复杂度。In the above technical solution, when there are multiple time domain locations for receiving the control information in the vicinity of the time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or the time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the terminal may be determined according to the identifier of the terminal device. The devices are grouped, and different groups correspond to one of the time domain locations for receiving the control information, thereby reducing the number of terminal devices that are paged in one time domain location, and reducing the operation of the network device. the complexity.
结合第一方面以及第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式中,该第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或该终端设备监测该控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,该第一同步信号块为该同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,该第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在该同步信号块测量时间内。In conjunction with the first aspect, and the first possible implementation of the first aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the terminal device Monitoring a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, where the first parameter includes the synchronization signal block measurement time In the case of the time domain position, the time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
在上述技术方案中,由于同步信号块的索引与终端设备接收该控制信息的时域位置之间可能相关联,这样,终端设备还可以结合同步信号块的索引来确定用于接收该控制信息的时域位置,从而可以保证来确定用于接收该控制信息的位置与同步信号块所在的时域位置相接近,提高同步信号块的有效性。In the foregoing technical solution, since the index of the synchronization signal block may be associated with the time domain location of the terminal device receiving the control information, the terminal device may further determine, according to the index of the synchronization signal block, the control information for receiving the control information. The time domain position can be ensured to determine that the position for receiving the control information is close to the time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, thereby improving the effectiveness of the synchronization signal block.
另外,终端设备还可以根据终端设备监测该控制信息的周期和/或同步信号块的索引来确定用于接收该控制信息的位置,可以增加终端设备的灵活性。In addition, the terminal device may further determine the location for receiving the control information according to the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information and/or the index of the synchronization signal block, and may increase the flexibility of the terminal device.
结合第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中,该控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,该第一时域位置为根据该终端设备的标识以及该终端设备监测该控制信息的周期确定的,该偏移量为根据第二参数确定的;With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain location after the offset is increased by the first time domain location The first time domain location is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
该第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first sync signal block is located;
该同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is;
该第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first sync signal block;
该终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
在上述技术方案中,终端设备可以使用根据第二参数确定的偏移量,来调整用于接收该控制信息的时域位置,从而可以使最终确定出的用于接收该控制信息的时域位置与第一参数更加接近或相同,进而可以减少终端设备醒来的次数,可以节省终端设备的功耗。In the above technical solution, the terminal device may adjust the time domain location for receiving the control information by using an offset determined according to the second parameter, so that the finally determined time domain location for receiving the control information may be determined. It is closer to or the same as the first parameter, thereby reducing the number of times the terminal device wakes up, and the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved.
结合第一方面至第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中,该第一参数还包含第三参数,该第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,该第一周期为该同步信号块的周期或该同步信号块测量时间的周期,该第四参数为该控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。With reference to the third aspect, the third possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first parameter further includes a third parameter, the maximum value of the third parameter is The first period or the fourth parameter determines that the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of the search space of the control information.
在上述技术方案中,通过将第三参数的最大值与该同步信号块的周期或该同步信号块测量时间的周期或该控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔相关联的方式,使终端设备根据该第三参数确定出的用于接收该控制信息的时域位置相接近,提供了一种新的方式,可以增加终端设备的灵活性。In the above technical solution, the terminal device is made to associate the maximum value of the third parameter with the period of the synchronization signal block or the period of the synchronization signal block measurement time or the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information. The time domain locations determined for receiving the control information according to the third parameter are close to each other, providing a new way to increase the flexibility of the terminal device.
结合第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中,该第三参数的最大值为该终端设备监测该控制信息的周期与该第一周期的比值,或该第三参数的最大值为该终端设备监测该控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information and the first period The ratio, or the maximum value of the third parameter, is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
在上述技术方案中,给出了第三参数的最大值与该同步信号块的周期或该同步信号块测量时间的周期或该控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔的关联关系。In the above technical solution, the relationship between the maximum value of the third parameter and the period of the synchronization signal block or the period of the synchronization signal block measurement time or the interval of the monitoring space of the search space of the control information is given.
结合第一方面至第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中,该控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,该同步信号块所在的时域位置为该同步信号块所在的帧的位置,该同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为该同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。With reference to the first aspect to the fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located, The time domain position of the synchronization signal block is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
在上述技术方案中,对时域位置进行了说明。In the above technical solution, the time domain position is explained.
结合第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中,根据该终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定该控制信息在该控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,该第一同步信号块为该同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,该第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在该同步信号块测量时间内。With reference to the sixth possible implementation of the first aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, determining, by the identifier of the terminal device, and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, the control information is a time slot in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and the first parameter includes a synchronization signal block measurement In the case of the position of the frame in which the time is located, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
在上述方案中,当时域位置为终端设备接收该控制信息所在的帧,则终端设备还可以根据该终端设备的标识或同步信息块的索引,进一步确定该控制信息在该帧中的时隙,可以使终端设备能够准确接收该控制信息。In the above solution, the time domain location is the frame in which the terminal device receives the control information, and the terminal device may further determine the time slot of the control information in the frame according to the identifier of the terminal device or the index of the synchronization information block. The terminal device can be enabled to accurately receive the control information.
结合第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式中,该控制信息所在的时域位置、第一时域位置及偏移量满足如下表达式:With reference to the third possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the eighth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the time domain location, the first time domain location, and the offset of the control information meet the following expression:
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset);或SFN=(SFN_1+Offset); or
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset)mod Num_SFN;或SFN=(SFN_1+Offset)mod Num_SFN; or
SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset)mod T;或SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset)mod T; or
(SFN-Offset)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N);或(SFN-Offset) mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N); or
(SFN+Offset)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N);(SFN+Offset) mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N);
其中,SFN表示该控制信息所在的时域位置的系统帧号,mod函数表示取模运算,SFN_1表示第一时域位置,SFN_1满足如下表达式:SFN_1mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N),Num_SFN表示系统帧号的最大值或系统帧号的最大值与1的和,Offset表示偏移量,T表示终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期,UE_ID表示终端设备的标识,N=min(T,nB),参数nB用来网络设备的寻呼密度,其中,Offset可以为包含Offset_UE、Offset_SSB、Offset_SMTC以及Offset_SSBIndex中的一个或多个的和,Offset_UE表示根据终端设备的标识确定的偏移量,Offset_SSB表示根据SSB的时域位置确定的偏移量,Offset_SMTC表示根据SMTC的时域位置确定的偏移量,Offset_SSBIndex表示根据SSB的索引确定的偏移量。The SFN indicates the system frame number of the time domain location where the control information is located, the mod function indicates the modulo operation, SFN_1 indicates the first time domain location, and SFN_1 satisfies the following expression: SFN_1mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N), Num_SFN represents the maximum value of the system frame number or the sum of the maximum value of the system frame number and 1, Offset represents the offset, T represents the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, and UE_ID represents the identity of the terminal device, N= Min (T, nB), the parameter nB is used for the paging density of the network device, wherein the Offset may be a sum including one or more of Offset_UE, Offset_SSB, Offset_SMTC, and Offset_SSBIndex, and Offset_UE indicates a bias determined according to the identifier of the terminal device. The shift amount, Offset_SSB represents the offset determined according to the time domain position of the SSB, Offset_SMTC represents the offset determined according to the time domain position of the SMTC, and Offset_SSBIndex represents the offset determined according to the index of the SSB.
结合第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式中,Offset_UE满足如下表达式:In conjunction with the eighth possible implementation of the first aspect, in a ninth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, Offset_UE satisfies the following expression:
Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N)mod E);或Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N)mod E); or
Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)mod E);Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)mod E);
其中,Offset_UE表示所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所 在的时域位置之间的间隔,floor()函数表示向下取整运算,mod函数表示取模运算,E表示在以所述第一参数为中心的时域位置范围内包含的用于发送所述控制信息的时域位置的个数,I表示所述E个时域位置中每两个时域位置之间的间隔,N=min(T,nB),参数nB用来网络设备的寻呼密度,G为正整数。Wherein, Offset_UE indicates an interval between a time domain position where the control information is located and a time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a floor() function indicates a rounding operation, and a mod function indicates a modulo operation, E Denoting the number of time domain locations for transmitting the control information included in a time domain location range centered on the first parameter, and I represents each of the two time domain locations in the E time domain locations The interval between them, N=min(T, nB), the parameter nB is used for the paging density of the network device, and G is a positive integer.
结合第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第十种可能的实现方式中,Offset_SSBIndex满足如下表达式:In conjunction with the eighth possible implementation of the first aspect, in a tenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, Offset_SSBIndex satisfies the following expression:
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000001
or
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000002
or
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000003
or
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000004
其中,J为整数,i为同步信号块的索引,
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000005
表示一个帧中的时隙的数量,M和O为网络设备配置的,μ∈{0,1,2,3}是承载剩余系统信息RMSI DCI的物理下行控制信道PDCCH使用的子载波间隔。
Where J is an integer and i is an index of the sync block.
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000005
Represents the number of time slots in a frame, M and O are configured for the network device, and μ∈{0, 1, 2, 3} is the subcarrier spacing used by the physical downlink control channel PDCCH carrying the remaining system information RMSI DCI.
结合第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中,Offset_SMTC满足如下表达式:In conjunction with the eighth possible implementation of the first aspect, in an eleventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, Offset_SMTC satisfies the following expression:
Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B;或Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B; or
Offset_SMTC=floor((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B;或Offset_SMTC=floor((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B; or
Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L;Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L;
其中,*可以表示相乘运算,SFN_SMTC为同步信号块检测时间SMTC所在的帧的帧号SFN的最小值,或,SFN_SMTC为从SFN 0开始第一个SMTC所在的帧的SFN,或,SFN_SMTC为从SFN 0开始第一个SMTC所在的帧距离SFN 0的偏移值,L为整数,或L=B+((SFN_SMTC+C)modA),A,B和C为整数,ceil()函数为向上取整的函数。Wherein, * can represent a multiplication operation, SFN_SMTC is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the synchronization signal block detection time SMTC is located, or SFN_SMTC is the SFN of the frame in which the first SMTC is located from SFN 0, or SFN_SMTC is The offset value of the frame distance SFN 0 where the first SMTC is located from SFN 0, L is an integer, or L=B+((SFN_SMTC+C)modA), A, B, and C are integers, and the ceil() function is upward. Rounded function.
结合第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中,Offset_SSB满足如下表达式:In conjunction with the eighth possible implementation of the first aspect, in a twelfth possible implementation of the first aspect, Offset_SSB satisfies the following expression:
Offset_SSB=ceil((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B;或Offset_SSB=ceil((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B; or
Offset_SSB=floor((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B;或Offset_SSB=floor((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B; or
Offset_SSB=SFN_SSB+L;Offset_SSB=SFN_SSB+L;
其中,SFN_SSB为同步信号块SSB所在的帧的帧号SFN的最小值,或,SFN_SSB为从SFN 0开始第一个SSB所在的帧的SFN,或,SFN_SSB为从SFN 0开始第一个SSB所在的帧距离SFN 0的偏移值,L为整数,或L=B+((SFN_SSB+C)modA),A,B和C为整数,ceil()函数为向上取整的函数。Wherein, SFN_SSB is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the synchronization signal block SSB is located, or SFN_SSB is the SFN of the frame in which the first SSB is located from SFN 0, or SFN_SSB is the first SSB from SFN 0 The offset of the frame distance SFN 0, L is an integer, or L = B + ((SFN_SSB + C) modA), A, B and C are integers, and the ceil() function is a function of rounding up.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种控制信息的接收方法,终端设备根据所述终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙,终端设备在所述时隙接收所述控制信息。In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a method for receiving control information, where a terminal device determines a time slot in which control information is located according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of a synchronization signal block, where the terminal device is in the time slot. Receiving the control information.
在上述技术方案中,提出了一种确定控制信息的时隙的方法,且终端设备可以根据同步信号块,从而可以使最终确定出的用于接收该控制信息的时隙与同步信号块相接近或相同,从而终端设备在接收该控制信息之前,可以先根据同步信号块进行下行同步,完成下行同步后,在该时隙上接收该控制信息,可以保证提高同步的有效性。In the above technical solution, a method for determining a time slot of control information is proposed, and the terminal device can be based on the synchronization signal block, so that the finally determined time slot for receiving the control information is close to the synchronization signal block. Or the same, so that the terminal device can perform downlink synchronization according to the synchronization signal block before receiving the control information, and after receiving the downlink synchronization, receiving the control information in the time slot, can ensure the effectiveness of synchronization.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式下,终端设备根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,然后在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。With reference to the second aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the terminal device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, and then in the frame The time slot receives the control information.
在上述技术方案中,终端设备还可以根据终端设备的标识和同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,从而可以准确接收该控制信息。In the above technical solution, the terminal device may further determine the frame in which the control information is located according to the identifier of the terminal device and the index of the synchronization signal block, so that the control information can be accurately received.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种控制信息发送方法,该方法包括:网络设备在发生控制信息之前,首先根据终端设备的标识和第一参数集合确定该控制信息所在的时域位置,其中,该第一参数集合包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,然后,在该控制信息所在的时域位置内向终端设备发送该控制信息。In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting control information, where the method includes: first, determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter set, a time domain location where the control information is located before the control information is generated, where And the first parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and then the control information is sent to the terminal device in a time domain location where the control information is located.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置时,该控制信息所在的时域位置与该同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据该终端设备的标识确定;或,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置时,该控制信息所在的时域位置与该同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据该终端设备的标识确定。With reference to the third aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, when the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, when the first parameter includes the time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain location where the control information is located and the measurement time of the synchronization signal block are located The interval between time domain locations is determined based on the identity of the terminal device.
结合第三方面以及第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式中,该第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或该终端设备监测该控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,该第一同步信号块为该同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,该第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在该同步信号块测量时间内。With reference to the third aspect, and the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the terminal device Monitoring a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, where the first parameter includes the synchronization signal block measurement time In the case of the time domain position, the time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
结合第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式,在第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式中,该控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,该第一时域位置为根据该终端设备的标识以及该终端设备监测该控制信息的周期确定的,该偏移量为根据第二参数确定的;With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain location after the offset is increased by the first time domain location The first time domain location is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
该第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first sync signal block is located;
该同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is;
该第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first sync signal block;
该终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
结合第三方面至第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式,在第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式中,该第一参数还包含第三参数,该第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,该第一周期为该同步信号块的周期或该同步信号块测量时间的周期,该第四参数为该控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。With the third aspect to the third possible implementation of the third aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the first parameter further includes a third parameter, and the maximum value of the third parameter is The first period or the fourth parameter determines that the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of the search space of the control information.
结合第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式,在第三方面的第五种可能的实现方式中,该第三参数的最大值为该终端设备监测该控制信息的周期与该第一周期的比值,或该第三参数的最大值为该终端设备监测该控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information and the first period The ratio, or the maximum value of the third parameter, is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
结合第三方面至第三方面的第五种可能的实现方式,在第三方面的第六种可能的实现方式中,该控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,该同步信号块所在的时域位置为该同步信号块所在的帧的位置,该同步信号块测量时间所在的 时域位置为该同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。With reference to the fifth aspect, the fifth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located, The time domain position of the synchronization signal block is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
结合第三方面的第六种可能的实现方式,在第三方面的第七种可能的实现方式中,根据该终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定该控制信息在该控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,该第一同步信号块为该同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,该第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在该同步信号块测量时间内。In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the third aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the third aspect, determining, by the identifier of the terminal device, and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, the control information is a time slot in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and the first parameter includes a synchronization signal block measurement In the case of the position of the frame in which the time is located, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种控制信息的接收方法,网络设备根据终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙,网络设备在所述时隙发送所述控制信息。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for receiving control information, where a network device determines, according to an identifier of a terminal device and/or an index of a synchronization signal block, a time slot in which control information is located, where the network device sends the location in the time slot. Control information.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式下,网络设备根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the network device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, in the frame The time slot receives the control information.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述第一方面描述的方法。所述通信装置还可以包括存储器,用于存储程序指令和数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器可以调用并执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令,用于实现上述第一方面描述的方法中的任意一种方法中。所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口,所述通信接口用于该通信装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备为网络设备。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus includes a processor, and is used to implement the method described in the foregoing first aspect. The communication device can also include a memory for storing program instructions and data. The memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor can invoke and execute program instructions stored in the memory for implementing any of the methods described in the first aspect above. The communication device can also include a communication interface for the communication device to communicate with other devices. Illustratively, the other device is a network device.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置包括:In one possible design, the communication device includes:
处理器,用于根据终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;a processor, configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
存储器,用于存储程序指令;a memory for storing program instructions;
通信接口,用于在所述处理器的控制下,在所述控制信息所在的时域位置内接收所述控制信息。And a communication interface, configured to receive the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located under control of the processor.
结合第五方面,在第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或,第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。With reference to the fifth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located, and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the synchronization signal block measurement time The interval between the time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
结合第五方面以及第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式中,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。With reference to the fifth aspect, and the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the The terminal device monitors a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and the first parameter includes a synchronization signal In the case where the block measurement time is in the time domain position, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
结合第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式,在第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式中,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为所述处理器根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为所述处理器根据第二参数确定的;With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain after the offset is increased by the first time domain location a location, wherein the first time domain location is determined by the processor according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is Determined by two parameters;
其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first synchronization signal block is located;
所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
结合第五方面至第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式,在第五方面的第四种可能的实现方式中,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。With reference to the fifth aspect, the third possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the first parameter further includes a third parameter, a maximum value of the third parameter Determining, according to the first period or the fourth parameter, the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a monitoring opportunity of a search space of the control information Interval.
结合第五方面的第四种可能的实现方式,在第五方面的第五种可能的实现方式中,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information The ratio of the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
结合第五方面至第五方面的第五种可能的实现方式,在第五方面的第六种可能的实现方式中,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。With reference to the fifth aspect, the fifth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in the sixth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located The time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
结合第五方面的第六种可能的实现方式,在第五方面的第七种可能的实现方式中,所述处理器还用于:In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the fifth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to:
根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, a time slot of the control information in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, where the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述第二方面描述的方法。所述通信装置还可以包括存储器,用于存储程序指令和数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器可以调用并执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令,用于实现上述第二方面描述的方法中的任意一种方法中。所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口,所述通信接口用于该通信装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备为网络设备。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus includes a processor, and is configured to implement the method described in the foregoing second aspect. The communication device can also include a memory for storing program instructions and data. The memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor can invoke and execute program instructions stored in the memory for implementing any of the methods described in the second aspect above. The communication device can also include a communication interface for the communication device to communicate with other devices. Illustratively, the other device is a network device.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置包括:In one possible design, the communication device includes:
处理器,用于根据终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙;a processor, configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
通信接口,用于在所述时隙接收所述控制信息。And a communication interface, configured to receive the control information in the time slot.
结合第六方面,在第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式下,处理器用于根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,通信接口用于在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。With reference to the sixth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, where the communication interface is used to The time slot in the frame receives the control information.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述第三方面描述的方法。所述通信装置还可以包括存储器,用于存储程序指令和数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器可以调用并执行所述存储器中存储 的程序指令,用于实现上述第三方面描述的方法中的任意一种方法中。所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口,所述通信接口用于该通信装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备为终端设备。In a seventh aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus includes a processor, and is used to implement the method described in the foregoing third aspect. The communication device can also include a memory for storing program instructions and data. The memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor can invoke and execute program instructions stored in the memory for implementing any of the methods described in the third aspect above. The communication device can also include a communication interface for the communication device to communicate with other devices. Illustratively, the other device is a terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置包括:In one possible design, the communication device includes:
处理器,用于根据终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;a processor, configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
存储器,用于存储程序指令;a memory for storing program instructions;
通信接口,用于在所述处理器的控制下,在所述控制信息所在的时域位置内向所述终端设备发送所述控制信息。And a communication interface, configured to send the control information to the terminal device in a time domain location where the control information is located under control of the processor.
结合第七方面,在第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或,第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。With reference to the seventh aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located, and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the synchronization signal block measurement time The interval between the time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
结合第七方面以及第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第七方面的第二种可能的实现方式中,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数集合包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数集合包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。With reference to the seventh aspect, and the first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the The terminal device monitors a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and is included in the first parameter set In the case where the synchronization signal block measures the time domain position in which the time is located, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
结合第七方面的第二种可能的实现方式,在第七方面的第三种可能的实现方式中,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为根据第二参数确定的;With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain after the offset is increased by the first time domain location a location, where the first time domain location is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to a second parameter;
其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first synchronization signal block is located;
所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
结合第七方面至第七方面的第三种可能的实现方式,在第七方面的第四种可能的实现方式中,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。With reference to the third possible implementation of the seventh aspect to the seventh aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the first parameter further includes a third parameter, a maximum value of the third parameter Determining, according to the first period or the fourth parameter, the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a monitoring opportunity of a search space of the control information Interval.
结合第七方面的第四种可能的实现方式,在第七方面的第五种可能的实现方式中,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information The ratio of the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
结合第七方面至第七方面的第五种可能的实现方式,在第四方面的第六种可能的实现方式中,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,所述同 步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。With reference to the fifth possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect to the seventh aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located The time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
结合第七方面的第六种可能的实现方式,在第七方面的第七种可能的实现方式中,所述处理器还用于:In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the seventh aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the processor is further configured to:
根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, a time slot of the control information in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, where the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述第四方面描述的方法。所述通信装置还可以包括存储器,用于存储程序指令和数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器可以调用并执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令,用于实现上述第四方面描述的方法中的任意一种方法中。所述通信装置还可以包括通信接口,所述通信接口用于该通信装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备为网络设备。In an eighth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus includes a processor, and is used to implement the method described in the foregoing fourth aspect. The communication device can also include a memory for storing program instructions and data. The memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor can invoke and execute program instructions stored in the memory for implementing any of the methods described in the fourth aspect above. The communication device can also include a communication interface for the communication device to communicate with other devices. Illustratively, the other device is a network device.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置包括:In one possible design, the communication device includes:
处理器,用于根据终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙;a processor, configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
通信接口,用于在所述时隙发送所述控制信息。And a communication interface, configured to send the control information in the time slot.
结合第八方面,在第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式下,处理器用于根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,通信接口用于在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。With reference to the eighth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the processor is configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, where the communication interface is used to The time slot in the frame receives the control information.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块,这些模块可以执行上述第一方面任一种设计示例中的终端设备所执行的相应功能,具体的:In a ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device, where the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the foregoing first aspect. The corresponding function performed by the terminal device in any of the design examples, specifically:
处理模块,用于根据所述通信装置的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;a processing module, configured to determine a time domain location where the control information is located according to the identifier and the first parameter of the communication device, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located ;
接收模块,用于在所述控制信息所在的时域位置内接收所述控制信息。And a receiving module, configured to receive the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located.
结合第九方面,在第九方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或,第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。In conjunction with the ninth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, and a time domain location where the control information is located and a time when the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the synchronization signal block measurement time The interval between the time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
结合第九方面以及第九方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第九方面的第二种可能的实现方式中,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。With reference to the ninth aspect, and the first possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or the The terminal device monitors a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and the first parameter includes a synchronization signal In the case where the block measurement time is in the time domain position, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
结合第九方面的第二种可能的实现方式,在第九方面的第三种可能的实现方式中,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为所述处理器根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为所述处理器根据第二参数确定的;With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain after the offset is increased by the first time domain location a location, wherein the first time domain location is determined by the processor according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is Determined by two parameters;
其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first synchronization signal block is located;
所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
结合第九方面至第九方面的第三种可能的实现方式,在第九方面的第四种可能的实现方式中,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。With reference to the third possible implementation of the ninth aspect to the ninth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the first parameter further includes a third parameter, and a maximum value of the third parameter Determining, according to the first period or the fourth parameter, the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a monitoring opportunity of a search space of the control information Interval.
结合第九方面的第四种可能的实现方式,在第九方面的第五种可能的实现方式中,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information The ratio of the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
结合第九方面至第九方面的第五种可能的实现方式,在第九方面的第六种可能的实现方式中,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。With reference to the fifth possible implementation manner of the ninth to ninth aspects, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is a location of a frame where the control information is located The time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
结合第九方面的第六种可能的实现方式,在第九方面的第七种可能的实现方式中,所述处理模块还用于:In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the ninth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the processing module is further configured to:
根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, a time slot of the control information in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, where the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块,这些模块可以执行上述第二方面任一种设计示例中的网络设备所执行的相应功能,具体的:In a tenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device, where the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the foregoing second aspect. The corresponding function performed by the network device in any of the design examples, specifically:
处理模块,用于根据所述终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙;a processing module, configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
通信模块,用于在所述时隙接收所述控制信息。And a communication module, configured to receive the control information in the time slot.
结合第十方面,在第十方面的第一种可能的实现方式下,处理模块用于根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,通信模块用于在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。With reference to the tenth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the tenth aspect, the processing module is configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which the control information is located, where the communication module is used The control information is received in the time slot in the frame.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块,这些模块可以 执行上述第三方面任一种设计示例中的网络设备所执行的相应功能,具体的:In an eleventh aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device or a device in a network device, where the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the foregoing third The corresponding function performed by the network device in any of the design examples, specifically:
处理模块,用于根据终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;a processing module, configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
通信模块,用于在所述控制信息所在的时域位置向所述终端设备发送所述控制信息。And a communication module, configured to send the control information to the terminal device at a time domain location where the control information is located.
结合第十一方面,在第十一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或,第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。In conjunction with the eleventh aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location where the control information is located, and the synchronization signal block The interval between the time domain locations is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the synchronization signal block measurement The interval between the time domain locations where the time is located is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
结合第十一方面以及第十一方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第十一方面的第二种可能的实现方式中,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数集合包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数集合包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。With reference to the eleventh aspect, and the first possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or Or the terminal device monitors a period of the control information; wherein, in a case where the first parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, at the first In the case where the parameter set includes the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
结合第十一方面的第二种可能的实现方式,在第十一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为根据第二参数确定的;With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, the time domain position of the control information is after the offset of the first time domain position is increased a time domain location, where the first time domain location is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first synchronization signal block is located;
所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
结合第十一方面至第十一方面的第三种可能的实现方式,在第十一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。With reference to the third possible implementation of the eleventh to eleventh aspects, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, the first parameter further includes a third parameter, the third parameter The maximum value is determined according to a first period or a fourth parameter, wherein the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is a search space of the control information. The timing of monitoring timing.
结合第十一方面的第十一种可能的实现方式,在第十一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。With reference to the eleventh possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, a maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information The ratio of the first period to the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
结合第十一方面至第十一方面的第五种可能的实现方式,在第十一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。With reference to the fifth possible implementation manner of the eleventh to eleventh aspects, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, the time domain location where the control information is located is where the control information is located a position of the frame, a time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, a position of a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located, and a time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is a frame in which the synchronization signal block measurement time is located position.
结合第十一方面的第六种可能的实现方式,在第十一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中,所述处理模块还用于:In conjunction with the sixth possible implementation of the eleventh aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, the processing module is further configured to:
根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, a time slot of the control information in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, where the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和通信模块,这些模块可以执行上述第四方面任一种设计示例中的网络设备所执行的相应功能,具体的:In a twelfth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device or a device in a network device, where the communication device may include a processing module and a communication module, and the modules may perform the fourth The corresponding function performed by the network device in any of the design examples, specifically:
处理模块,用于根据终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙;a processing module, configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
通信模块,用于在所述时隙发送所述控制信息。And a communication module, configured to send the control information in the time slot.
结合第十二方面,在第十二方面的第一种可能的实现方式下,处理模块用于根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧;通信模块用于在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。With reference to the twelfth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the twelfth aspect, the processing module is configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which control information is located; The control information is received for the time slot in the frame.
第十三方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面所述的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable storage medium, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method described in the first aspect.
第十四方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第二方面所述的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable storage medium, comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method of the second aspect.
第十五方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第三方面所述的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable storage medium, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method described in the third aspect.
第十六方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第四方面所述的方法。In a sixteenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable storage medium, comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method described in the fourth aspect.
第十七方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面所述的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, a computer program product, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method described in the first aspect.
第十八方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第二方面所述的方法。In an eighteenth aspect, a computer program product, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method described in the second aspect.
第十九方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第三方面所述的方法。In a nineteenth aspect, a computer program product, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method described in the third aspect.
第二十方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第四方面所述的方法。In a twentieth aspect, a computer program product, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method described in the fourth aspect.
第二十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现第一方面所述的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a twenty-first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the method described in the first aspect. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
第二十二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现第二方面所述的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a twenty-second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the method described in the second aspect. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
第二十三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现第三方面所述的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a twenty-third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the method described in the third aspect. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
第二十四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现第四方面所述的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a twenty-fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and further includes a memory for implementing the method described in the fourth aspect. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
第二十五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种系统,所述系统包括第五方面所述的通信装置和第九方面所述的通信装置。In a twenty-fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes the communication device of the fifth aspect and the communication device of the ninth aspect.
第二十六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种系统,所述系统包括第六方面所述的通信装置和第十方面所述的通信装置。According to a twenty-sixth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes the communication device of the sixth aspect and the communication device of the tenth aspect.
第二十七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种系统,所述系统包括第七方面所述的通信装置和第十一方面所述的通信装置。According to a twenty-seventh aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes the communication device of the seventh aspect and the communication device of the eleventh aspect.
第二十八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种系统,所述系统包括第八方面所述的通信装置和第十二方面所述的通信装置。The twenty-eighth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a system, comprising the communication device according to the eighth aspect, and the communication device according to the twelfth aspect.
第二十九方面,结合第五方面至第十二方面及其的各种可能的实现方式,在可能的实施例中,所述的通信装置为终端或芯片,其中,芯片可以是设置于终端内的芯片,也可以是设置于终端外并与终端耦合的芯片。The twenty-ninth aspect, in combination with the fifth aspect to the twelfth aspect and various possible implementation manners thereof, in a possible embodiment, the communication device is a terminal or a chip, wherein the chip may be disposed at the terminal The chip inside may also be a chip disposed outside the terminal and coupled to the terminal.
第三十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种处理器,包括至少一个电路,用于执行第一方面至第四方面及其的各种可能的实现方式的通信方法。In a thirtieth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a processor, including at least one circuit, for performing the communication methods of the first to fourth aspects and various possible implementation manners thereof.
上述第三方面至第三十方面及其实现方式的有益效果可以参考对第一方面以及第二方面的方法及其实现方式的有益效果的描述。Advantages of the above-described third to thirtieth aspects and their implementations can be referred to the description of the beneficial effects of the first aspect and the method of the second aspect and its implementation.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1A-图1B为现有技术中的两种寻呼流程图;1A-1B are two paging flowcharts in the prior art;
图2为本申请实施例的应用场景示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种控制信息的发送及接收方法的流程图;FIG. 3 is a flowchart of a method for sending and receiving control information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例中SSB所在的半帧的及候选SSB的示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a field and a candidate SSB in which the SSB is located in the embodiment of the present application;
图5A-图5D为本申请实施例中网络设备用于向终端设备发送Paging DCI的帧的示意图;5A-5D are schematic diagrams of a frame used by a network device to send a paging DCI to a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6A-图6C为本申请实施例中SSB所在的帧和Paging DCI所在的帧的示意图;6A-6C are schematic diagrams of a frame in which an SSB is located and a frame in which a Paging DCI is located in the embodiment of the present application;
图7A为本申请实施例中SMTC所在的帧的示意图;7A is a schematic diagram of a frame in which an SMTC is located in an embodiment of the present application;
图7B为本申请实施例中通过(1)中方法确定偏移量得到的SFN和SFN_1的示意图;7B is a schematic diagram of SFN and SFN_1 obtained by determining an offset by the method in (1) in the embodiment of the present application;
图8A为本申请实施例中在第一时域位置附近用于发送控制信息的帧的示意图;FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of a frame for transmitting control information in the vicinity of a first time domain location in the embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图8B为本申请实施例中通过(3)中方法确定偏移量得到的SFN和SFN_1的示意图;8B is a schematic diagram of SFN and SFN_1 obtained by determining an offset by the method in (3) in the embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实例中SSB和RMSI CORESET之间的复用图样示意图;9 is a schematic diagram of a multiplexing pattern between SSB and RMSI CORESET in the example of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例中通过(5)中方法确定偏移量得到的SFN和SFN_1的示意图;10 is a schematic diagram of SFN and SFN_1 obtained by determining an offset by the method in (5) in the embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例中一个帧中有大于一个用于发送控制信息的时隙的示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a time slot having more than one time slot for transmitting control information in a frame according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图12-图15为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments.
以下,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。Hereinafter, some of the terms in the embodiments of the present application will be explained so as to be understood by those skilled in the art.
(1)网络设备,本申请实施例涉及到的网络设备包括基站(base station,BS),基站可能有多种形式,比如宏基站、微基站、中继站和接入点等。示例性地,本申请实施例涉及到的基站可以是NR中的基站,其中,NR中的基站还可以称为发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)或gNB,也可以是GSM或CDMA中的基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是WCDMA系统中的节点B(NodeB,NB),还可以是LTE系统中的演进型节点B(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是未来5G网络中的下一代节点B(Next generation Node B,gNB)。本申请实施例涉及到的网络设备也可以包括一种部署在无线接入网中能够和终端进行无线通信的设备,例如,可以是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的网络设备等,例如,演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、网络设备控制器(Base Station Controller,BSC)、网络设备收发台(Base Transceiver Station,BTS)、家庭网络设备(例如,Home evolved NodeB,或Home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(BaseBand Unit,BBU)等。本申请实施例中,实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片、电路或者其它装置。本申请实施例中,以实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。(1) Network device, the network device involved in the embodiment of the present application includes a base station (BS), and the base station may have various forms, such as a macro base station, a micro base station, a relay station, and an access point. For example, the base station involved in the embodiment of the present application may be a base station in the NR, where the base station in the NR may also be referred to as a transmission reception point (TRP) or a gNB, or may be in a GSM or CDMA. The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) may also be a Node B (NodeB, NB) in the WCDMA system, or may be an Evolution Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in the LTE system, or may be Next generation Node B (gNB) in the future 5G network. The network device in the embodiment of the present application may also include a device that can be wirelessly communicated with the terminal in the wireless access network, for example, in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario. The wireless controller, or the network device, may be a relay station, an access point, and a network device in a future 5G network or a network device in a future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN), for example, an evolved node. B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), Network Device Controller (BSC), Network Device Transceiver (Base Transceiver Station) , BTS), home network equipment (for example, Home evolved NodeB, or Home Node B, HNB), BaseBand Unit (BBU), and the like. In the embodiment of the present application, the device that implements the function of the network device may be a network device, or may be a device that supports the network device to implement the function, such as a chip, a circuit, or other device. In the embodiment of the present application, the device that implements the function of the network device is a network device, and the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described.
(2)终端设备,本申请实施例涉及到的终端设备还可以称为终端,可以是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,其可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。终端设备可以是用户设备(user equipment,UE)。其中,UE包括具有无线通信功能的手持式设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备或计算设备。示例性地,UE可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑。终端设备还可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程医疗中的无线终端、智能电网中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请实施例中,实现终端的功能的装置可以是终端,也可以是支持终端实现该功能的装置,例如芯片、电路或者其它装置。本申请实施例中,以实现终端的功能的装置是终端为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。(2) A terminal device, which may be referred to as a terminal, may be a device having a wireless transceiver function, which may be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or on-board; It can be deployed on the water (such as ships); it can also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons, satellites, etc.). The terminal device may be a user equipment (UE). The UE includes a handheld device, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, or a computing device having a wireless communication function. Illustratively, the UE can be a mobile phone, a tablet, or a computer with wireless transceiving capabilities. The terminal device may also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in an unmanned vehicle, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, and an intelligent device. A wireless terminal in a power grid, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, and the like. In the embodiment of the present application, the device that implements the function of the terminal may be a terminal, or may be a device that supports the terminal to implement the function, such as a chip, a circuit, or other device. In the embodiment of the present application, the device that implements the function of the terminal is a terminal, and the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described.
(3)控制信息,可以用于指示或传输下行或上行调度信息,具体可以用于调度物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)或物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH),例如,调度用于承载寻呼消息的物理下行共享信道。调度信息可包括频域资源,时域资源,功率控制命令,或调制编码方式 等。控制信息还可以用于指示该控制信息只携带短消息,或用于指示该控制信息只携带调度信息,或用于指示该控制信息携带短消息和调度信息,或用于指示短消息,所述短消息可以为系统信息改变,商业移动告警服务(commercial mobile alert service,CMAS)通知,或地震和海啸预警系统(earthquake and tsunami warning system,ETWS)通知等。控制信息还可以用于请求信道质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI)报告,通知时隙格式等。控制信息也可以为下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)。本申请实施例中,控制信息可以为Paging DCI,Paging DCI可以表示用于调度承载寻呼消息的PDSCH的控制信息,或用于指示该控制信息只携带短消息的控制信息,或用于指示该控制信息只携带调度信息,或用于指示该控制信息携带短消息和调度信息的控制信息,或用于指示短消息的控制信息。Paging DCI可以是使用寻呼无线网络临时标识(paging eadio network temporary identifier,P-RNTI)加扰的。本申请实施例中,加扰DCI可以指DCI进行循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check,CRC)附着之后,使用无线网络临时标识对CRC校验位进行加扰;或者可以指使用RNTI对DCI进行CRC附着之后的序列加扰。(3) The control information may be used to indicate or transmit the downlink or uplink scheduling information, and may be used to schedule a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), for example, And scheduling a physical downlink shared channel for carrying paging messages. The scheduling information may include a frequency domain resource, a time domain resource, a power control command, or a modulation and coding mode. The control information may also be used to indicate that the control information only carries the short message, or to indicate that the control information only carries the scheduling information, or to indicate that the control information carries the short message and the scheduling information, or is used to indicate the short message, The short message may be a system information change, a commercial mobile alert service (CMAS) notification, or an earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) notification. The control information can also be used to request a channel quality indicator (CQI) report, notify the slot format, and the like. The control information may also be downlink control information (DCI). In this embodiment, the control information may be a Paging DCI, where the Paging DCI may indicate control information for scheduling a PDSCH carrying a paging message, or control information indicating that the control information only carries a short message, or used to indicate the The control information carries only scheduling information, or control information indicating that the control information carries short messages and scheduling information, or control information for indicating short messages. The Paging DCI may be scrambled using a paging eadio network temporary identifier (P-RNTI). In the embodiment of the present application, the scrambling DCI may refer to that the DCI performs the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) attachment, and uses the wireless network temporary identifier to scramble the CRC check bit; or may refer to using the RNTI to perform DCI on the DCI. The sequence after CRC attachment is scrambled.
(4)帧,可以为无线帧或者系统帧,可以用帧号或系统帧号(system frame number,SFN)来表示每个帧。(4) A frame, which may be a radio frame or a system frame, may be represented by a frame number or a system frame number (SFN).
(5)非连续接收DRX,终端设备可以使用非连续接收以减少功耗。终端设备在每个DRX周期内监测一个寻呼时机,终端设备在非寻呼时机可以不进行监测。一个寻呼时机可以包括Paging DCI可以被发送的多个时间单元。(5) Discontinuous reception of DRX, the terminal device can use discontinuous reception to reduce power consumption. The terminal device monitors a paging occasion during each DRX cycle, and the terminal device may not monitor at the non-paging occasion. A paging occasion can include a plurality of time units in which the paging DCI can be transmitted.
本申请实施例中,多个可以是两个、三个或者更多个,本申请实施例不做限制。正整数个可以是一个或多个。In the embodiment of the present application, the multiple may be two, three or more, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited. A positive integer can be one or more.
另外,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,如无特殊说明,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。In addition, the term "and/or" herein is merely an association relationship describing an associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate that A exists separately, and A and B exist at the same time. There are three cases of B alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article, unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
除非有相反的说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”、“第三”以及“第四”等序数词用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。Unless otherwise stated, the embodiments of the present application refer to ordinal numbers such as "first", "second", "third", and "fourth" for distinguishing multiple objects, and are not used to define multiple objects. Order, timing, priority, or importance.
为了更好地理解本申请实施例提供的技术方案,下面先介绍现有技术中的两种寻呼流程,如图1A-图1B所示,在图1A中,寻呼流程如下:In order to better understand the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, two paging processes in the prior art are first introduced. As shown in FIG. 1A to FIG. 1B, in FIG. 1A, the paging process is as follows:
a1、移动性管理实体(mobility management entity,MME)向网络设备发送PAGING;A1, a mobility management entity (MME) sends a PAGING to the network device;
当演进分组核心(evolved packet core,EPC)需要给终端设备发送数据或信令,例如,其他用户给终端设备打电话或者发短信息,终端设备在浏览器中浏览网页时有下行数据到达,等,或者终端设备需要重新附着时,则MME向网络设备发送PAGING来发起寻呼流程,网络设备接收该PAGING。When an evolved packet core (EPC) needs to send data or signaling to a terminal device, for example, other users call or send short messages to the terminal device, and the terminal device has downlink data when browsing the webpage in the browser, etc. Or, when the terminal device needs to reattach, the MME sends a PAGING to the network device to initiate a paging process, and the network device receives the PAGING.
a2、网络设备在特定的时域位置向终端设备发送寻呼消息Paging;A2, the network device sends a paging message Paging to the terminal device in a specific time domain location;
网络设备在接收到MME发送的PAGING后,根据终端设备的非连续接收(discontinuous receive,DRX)的周期T、参数nB以及终端设备的标识UE_ID,确定向终端设备发送寻呼消息Paging的寻呼帧(paging frame,PF)和寻呼时机(paging  occasion,PO)子帧。其中,参数nB的值可以为一个DRX周期T中寻呼时机的数量,这里的寻呼时机并不限于是一个终端设备的寻呼时机。具体来讲,PF用系统帧号SFN进行指示,该PF对应的SFN满足如下表达式:SFN mod T=(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N),其中,N为T和nB的最小值,mod函数表示取模运算,div函数表示除法运算;PO为在PF上的某个子帧,用i_s进行指示,其中,i_s满足如下表达式:i_s=floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns,floor函数表示向下取整运算,Ns为1和nB/T中的最大值。然后,网络设备在该PF的PO上向终端设备发送寻呼消息Paging。After receiving the PAGING sent by the MME, the network device determines to send the paging frame of the paging message Paging to the terminal device according to the period T of the discontinuous reception (DRX) of the terminal device, the parameter nB, and the identifier UE_ID of the terminal device. (paging frame, PF) and paging occasion (PO) subframes. The value of the parameter nB may be the number of paging occasions in a DRX cycle T. The paging occasion here is not limited to the paging occasion of one terminal device. Specifically, the PF is indicated by the system frame number SFN, and the SFN corresponding to the PF satisfies the following expression: SFN mod T=(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N), where N is the minimum value of T and nB, The mod function represents the modulo operation, the div function represents the division operation, and the PO is a sub-frame on the PF, which is indicated by i_s, where i_s satisfies the following expression: i_s=floor(UE_ID/N) mod Ns, floor function representation Round down the operation, Ns is the maximum of 1 and nB/T. Then, the network device sends a paging message Paging to the terminal device on the PO of the PF.
a3、终端设备在特定的时域位置监测并接收寻呼消息Paging。A3. The terminal device monitors and receives the paging message Paging in a specific time domain location.
终端设备在监测寻呼消息Paging之前,会采用如步骤a2中同样的方式,确定用于监测寻呼消息Paging的PF和PO,然后在确定出的PF中PO上或PO之前醒来,根据下行子帧中的CRS进行下行同步,从而获得下行定时,在完成下行同步之后,则根据下行定时监测并接收该寻呼消息Paging。Before monitoring the paging message Paging, the terminal device determines the PF and PO for monitoring the paging message Paging in the same manner as in step a2, and then wakes up in the determined PF in the PO or before the PO, according to the downlink. The CRS in the subframe performs downlink synchronization to obtain downlink timing. After the downlink synchronization is completed, the paging message Paging is monitored and received according to the downlink timing.
需要说明的是,在步骤a2中确定的PO,表示网络设备可以在该PO上向终端设备发送寻呼消息Paging,网络设备根据实际情况确定是否需要在该PO上发送该寻呼消息Paging,例如,当其他用户给终端设备打电话或者发短信息,网络设备确定需要在该PO上向终端设备发送寻呼消息Paging,网络设备可能在终端设备的某一个PO上发送寻呼消息Paging,当没有下行数据或信令需要发送给终端设备时,网络设备也可能在终端设备的某一个PO上没有发送寻呼消息Paging。因此,为了保证能够在网络设备发送寻呼消息Paging时,终端设备能够接收该寻呼消息Paging,终端设备需要在每一个确定的PO上监测寻呼消息Paging,当网络设备在某个PO上发送了寻呼消息Paging,终端设备则接收该寻呼消息Paging。It should be noted that the PO determined in step a2 indicates that the network device can send a paging message Paging to the terminal device on the PO, and the network device determines, according to the actual situation, whether the paging message Paging needs to be sent on the PO, for example. When the other user calls the terminal device or sends a short message, the network device determines that the paging message Paging needs to be sent to the terminal device on the PO, and the network device may send the paging message Paging on a PO of the terminal device, when there is no When the downlink data or signaling needs to be sent to the terminal device, the network device may also not send the paging message Paging on a certain PO of the terminal device. Therefore, in order to ensure that the terminal device can receive the paging message Paging when the network device sends the paging message Paging, the terminal device needs to monitor the paging message Paging on each determined PO, when the network device sends on a certain PO. The paging message Paging, the terminal device receives the paging message Paging.
另外,由于寻呼消息Paging是承载在PDSCH上的,因此,终端设备在监测或接收寻呼消息之前,需要监测或接收Paging DCI,其中,监测或接收Paging DCI与上述监测或接收寻呼消息Paging的流程相同。In addition, since the paging message Paging is carried on the PDSCH, the terminal device needs to monitor or receive the paging DCI before monitoring or receiving the paging message, wherein monitoring or receiving the paging DCI and the above monitoring or receiving paging message Paging The process is the same.
在图1A所示的寻呼流程中,寻呼流程是由MME发起的。在实际使用中,寻呼流程也可以由网络设备发起,如图1B所示,该寻呼流程如下:In the paging procedure shown in FIG. 1A, the paging procedure is initiated by the MME. In actual use, the paging process can also be initiated by the network device, as shown in FIG. 1B, and the paging process is as follows:
b1、网络设备在特定的时域位置向终端设备发送寻呼消息Paging;B1, the network device sends a paging message Paging to the terminal device in a specific time domain location;
当网络设备确定系统信息,例如主信息块(master information block,MIB)或者系统信息块(system information block,SIB)等,发生改变,则网络设备采用如步骤a2中的方式,确定向终端设备发送寻呼消息Paging的时域位置,然后在该确定的时域位置上向终端设备发送寻呼消息Paging。When the network device determines system information, such as a master information block (MIB) or a system information block (SIB), the network device determines to send to the terminal device by using the method in step a2. The time domain location of the paging message is advertised, and then the paging message Paging is sent to the terminal device at the determined time domain location.
b2、终端设备在特定的时域位置监测并接收寻呼消息Paging。B2. The terminal device monitors and receives the paging message Paging at a specific time domain location.
b2与a3相同,在此不再赘述。B2 is the same as a3, and will not be described here.
在现有技术中,终端设备在监测或接收寻呼消息Paging和/或Paging DCI之前,首先要根据CRS进行下行同步,由于CRS在每个下行子帧中发送,因此,终端设备只需要在监测或接收寻呼消息Paging和/或Paging DCI的时域位置或时域位置之前醒来,通过在该时域位置上和/或该时域位置附近传输的下行子帧中的CRS完成下行同步,即可在该时域位置监测或接收该寻呼消息Paging。In the prior art, before monitoring or receiving the paging message Paging and/or Paging DCI, the terminal device first performs downlink synchronization according to the CRS. Since the CRS is sent in each downlink subframe, the terminal device only needs to be monitored. Or waking up before receiving the time domain location or time domain location of the paging message Paging and/or Paging DCI, and completing the downlink synchronization by using the CRS in the downlink subframe transmitted near the time domain location and/or the time domain location, The paging message Paging can be monitored or received at the time domain location.
由于在NR系统中,下行子帧中没有CRS,因此,现有技术中的这种寻呼流程不 适用于类似于NR系统的这种没有CRS的系统。Since there is no CRS in the downlink subframe in the NR system, such a paging procedure in the prior art is not applicable to such a system without CRS similar to the NR system.
鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种控制信息的发送、接收方法及装置,用以发送或接收控制信息。In view of this, the embodiments of the present application provide a method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving control information, which are used to send or receive control information.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于NR系统,窄带物联网(narrow band internet over things,NB-IoT)系统,还可以适用于面向未来的通信技术,本申请实施例描述的系统是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。The technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the NR system, the narrow band internet over things (NB-IoT) system, and can also be applied to the future-oriented communication technology. The system described in the embodiment of the present application is for clearer. The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are not limited to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and those skilled in the art may know that the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are similar to the following. Technical issues are equally applicable.
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的技术方案,在下面的介绍过程中,以将本申请提供的技术方案应用在图2所示的应用场景中为例,在图2中包括网络设备和位于该网络设备的覆盖范围内的多个终端设备,网络设备可以在不同的时域位置向多个终端设备发送寻呼消息。The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the following description, the technical solution provided by the present application is applied to the application scenario shown in FIG. 2, and the network device is included in FIG. A plurality of terminal devices located within the coverage of the network device, the network device may send paging messages to the plurality of terminal devices at different time domain locations.
需要说明的是,图2所示的场景中,仅以一个网络设备和多个终端设备之间的交互为例来进行介绍,不应对本申请的应用场景造成限定。在实际的应用场景中,可以包括多个网络设备和多个终端。例如,一个终端设备可以只与一个网络设备进行数据传输,也可以与多个网络设备进行数据的传输,在本申请实施例中不作限制。It should be noted that, in the scenario shown in FIG. 2, only the interaction between one network device and multiple terminal devices is taken as an example, and the application scenario of the present application should not be limited. In a practical application scenario, multiple network devices and multiple terminals may be included. For example, a terminal device may perform data transmission with only one network device, and may also perform data transmission with multiple network devices, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
请参考图3,为本申请实施例提供的一种控制信息的发送及接收方法的流程图,该流程图的描述如下:Please refer to FIG. 3 , which is a flowchart of a method for sending and receiving control information according to an embodiment of the present application. The flowchart is described as follows:
步骤301、网络设备发送同步信息和参数信息。Step 301: The network device sends synchronization information and parameter information.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以为NR系统中的网络设备或者NB-IoT系统中的网络设备,为了方便说明,在下面的介绍中,均以该网络设备为NR系统中的网络设备为例,例如可以是gNB。相应地,本申请实施例中的终端设备则为NR系统中的终端设备。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device may be a network device in the NR system or a network device in the NB-IoT system. For convenience of description, in the following description, the network device is a network device in the NR system. For example, it may be gNB. Correspondingly, the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application is a terminal device in the NR system.
下面对同步信息和参数信息进行说明。The synchronization information and parameter information are described below.
在NR系统中,同步信息为同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal and PBCH block,SS/PBCH block)。一个SS/PBCH block是由主同步信号(primary synchronization signal,PSS),辅同步信号(secondary synchronization signal,SSS),物理广播信道(physical broadcast channel,PBCH)组成的。在本申请实施例中,将同步信号/物理广播信道块简称为同步信号块(SSB)。SSB可以用于终端设备获取小区的时间和频率同步,检测物理层小区ID,获取系统帧号SFN或获取主信息块(master information block,MIB)等。In the NR system, the synchronization information is a synchronization signal and a PBCH block (SS/PBCH block). An SS/PBCH block is composed of a primary synchronization signal (PSS), a secondary synchronization signal (SSS), and a physical broadcast channel (PBCH). In the embodiment of the present application, the synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block is simply referred to as a synchronization signal block (SSB). The SSB can be used for acquiring the time and frequency synchronization of the cell by the terminal device, detecting the physical layer cell ID, acquiring the system frame number SFN, or acquiring the master information block (MIB).
在SSB所在的半帧中,候选SSB的个数可以为4,8或64,且每个半帧中的候选SSB有各自的编号或索引。候选SSB的索引可以为0至(半帧中候选SSB的个数-1)中的一个值。终端设备可以根据SSB中PBCH的解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS)和/或PBCH负载确定该SSB的索引。SSB所在的半帧的周期可以为5ms,10ms,20ms,40ms,80ms,160ms,如图4所示,候选SSB的个数为4。SSB所在的半帧的周期可以是网络设备配置的。在SSB所在的半帧中,候选SSB的时域位置根据SSB的子载波间隔确定,并且在每种SSB的子载波间隔下,有一种或多种候选SSB时域位置图样。网络设备可以发送某个候选SSB,也可以不发送某个候选SSB, 网络设备可以发送指示信息,用于指示是否发送候选SSB。网络设备在发送SSB之前,需要确定SSB所在半帧,SSB所在半帧的周期,以及在SSB所在的半帧内候选SSB的时域位置。作为一种示例,可以根据网络规划人为地为网络设备配置上述信息。In the field in which the SSB is located, the number of candidate SSBs may be 4, 8, or 64, and the candidate SSBs in each field have respective numbers or indexes. The index of the candidate SSB may be one of 0 to (the number of candidate SSBs in the field is -1). The terminal device may determine an index of the SSB according to a Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) and/or a PBCH load of the PBCH in the SSB. The period of the field in which the SSB is located may be 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, 80 ms, and 160 ms. As shown in FIG. 4, the number of candidate SSBs is 4. The period of the field in which the SSB is located may be configured by the network device. In the field in which the SSB is located, the time domain location of the candidate SSB is determined according to the subcarrier spacing of the SSB, and under the subcarrier spacing of each SSB, there is one or more candidate SSB time domain location patterns. The network device may send a candidate SSB or may not send a certain candidate SSB, and the network device may send indication information for indicating whether to send the candidate SSB. Before sending the SSB, the network device needs to determine the field in which the SSB is located, the period of the field in which the SSB is located, and the time domain position of the candidate SSB in the field in which the SSB is located. As an example, the above information can be artificially configured for the network device according to the network plan.
参数信息包括以下信息中的至少一种:SSB所在半帧的周期,DRX周期,参数nB,同步信号/物理广播信道块测量时间配置(SS/PBCH block measurement time configuration,SMTC,)的周期、SMTC的偏移、SMTC的持续时间。本申请实施例中,将同步信号/物理广播信道块测量时间配置简称为同步信号块测量时间。参数信息中的一种或多种可以在主信息块(master information block,MIB)或系统信息块(system information block,SIB)中发送。参数信息中的一种或多种还可以通过无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)消息发送。例如,DRX周期和参数nB可以包含在系统信息SIB2中。The parameter information includes at least one of the following: a period of a field in which the SSB is located, a period of a DRX period, a parameter nB, a period of a synchronization signal/synchronous signal/station measurement block configuration (SMTC,), and a SMTC. The offset, the duration of the SMTC. In the embodiment of the present application, the synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block measurement time configuration is simply referred to as a synchronization signal block measurement time. One or more of the parameter information may be sent in a master information block (MIB) or a system information block (SIB). One or more of the parameter information may also be sent through a radio resource control (RRC) message. For example, the DRX cycle and the parameter nB may be included in the system information SIB2.
SMTC用于指示终端设备进行基于SSB的测量的时间资源。基于SSB的测量包括以下中的至少一种:同步信号参考信号接收功率(synchronization signal reference signal received power,SS-RSRP),同步信号参考信号接收质量(synchronization signal reference signal received quality,SS-RSRQ)和同步信号信干噪比(SS signal-to-noise and interference ratio,SS-SINR)。终端设备在每个DRX周期中需要测量服务小区的SS-RSRP和SS-RSRQ。终端设备测量SS-RSRP、SS-RSRQ以及SS-SINR的时域位置限制在SMTC中。SMTC是网络设备配置的。SMTC的周期的取值可以为5ms,10ms,20ms,40ms,80ms,160ms中的其中一种;SMTC的偏移的取值与SMTC的周期相关,偏移的取值为0至(SMTC的周期-1)中的一种,例如,当SMTC的周期为5ms时,偏移的取值可以为0,1,2,3,4中的其中一种,当SMTC的周期为10ms时,偏移的取值可以为0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9中的其中一种,当SMTC的周期为其他值时,偏移的取值以此类推,在此不再赘述;SMTC的持续时间可以为1ms,2ms,3ms,4ms,5ms中的其中一种。网络设备可以根据实际情况配置SMTC的周期、偏移、持续时间,在此不作限制。例如,网络设备可以根据SSB发送的时域位置配置SMTC。可选的,网络设备可以根据本小区中SSB发送的时域位置和/或邻小区中SSB发送的时域位置配置SMTC。The SMTC is used to instruct the terminal device to perform time resources for SSB based measurements. The SSB-based measurement includes at least one of: a synchronization signal reference signal received power (SS-RSRP), a synchronization signal reference signal received quality (SS-RSRQ), and SS signal-to-noise and interference ratio (SS-SINR). The terminal equipment needs to measure the SS-RSRP and SS-RSRQ of the serving cell in each DRX cycle. The terminal device measures the time domain locations of SS-RSRP, SS-RSRQ, and SS-SINR in the SMTC. The SMTC is configured for network devices. The period of the SMTC may be one of 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, 40ms, 80ms, and 160ms; the offset of the SMTC is related to the period of the SMTC, and the offset is 0 to (the period of the SMTC) One of -1), for example, when the period of the SMTC is 5 ms, the offset may be one of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and the offset is 10 ms when the period of the SMTC is 10 ms. The value can be one of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9. When the period of the SMTC is other values, the value of the offset is deduced by analogy. No longer repeat; SMTC duration can be one of 1ms, 2ms, 3ms, 4ms, 5ms. The network device can configure the period, offset, and duration of the SMTC according to the actual situation, which is not limited here. For example, the network device can configure the SMTC according to the time domain location sent by the SSB. Optionally, the network device may configure the SMTC according to the time domain location sent by the SSB in the local cell and/or the time domain location sent by the SSB in the neighboring cell.
网络设备可以根据实际情况配置nB的取值,在此不作限制,例如,网络设备可以配置nB为2T,T,T/2,T/4,T/8,T/16,T/32,T/64,T/128以及T/256中的其中一种。参数nB用来表示寻呼消息Paging或Paging DCI的密度。The network device can configure the value of nB according to the actual situation. There is no restriction here. For example, the network device can configure nB to be 2T, T, T/2, T/4, T/8, T/16, T/32, T. /64, one of T/128 and T/256. The parameter nB is used to indicate the density of the paging message Paging or Paging DCI.
步骤302、终端设备获取参数信息。Step 302: The terminal device acquires parameter information.
终端设备可以通过SSB获取小区时间和频率同步,进而获取网络设备发送的参数信息。The terminal device can acquire the cell time and frequency synchronization through the SSB, and obtain the parameter information sent by the network device.
步骤303、终端设备确定控制信息所在的时域位置。Step 303: The terminal device determines a time domain location where the control information is located.
具体来讲,终端设备根据该终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,该第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置。该第一参数可以包括同步信号块所在的时域位置,且不包括同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,或,该第一参数可以包括同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,且不包括同步信号块所在的时域位置,或,第一参数可以同时包含同步信号块所在的 时域位置以及同步信号测量时间所在的时域位置。同步信号块所在的时域位置可以是候选SSB的时域位置,也可以是网络设备发送SSB的时域位置,同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置即网络设备配置的SMTC所在的时域位置。Specifically, the terminal device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located. The first parameter may include a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, and does not include a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, or the first parameter may include a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and The time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, or the first parameter may include the time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located and the time domain position where the synchronization signal measurement time is located. The time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located may be the time domain location of the candidate SSB, or the time domain location where the network device sends the SSB, and the time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, that is, the time domain location where the SMTC configured by the network device is located. .
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,控制信息所在的时域位置为控制信息所在的帧,SSB所在的时域位置为SSB所在的帧,SMTC所在的时域位置为SMTC所在的帧;或,控制信息所在的时域位置为控制信息所在的帧的位置,SSB所在的时域位置为SSB所在的帧的位置,SMTC所在的时域位置为SMTC所在的帧的位置;或,控制信息所在的时域位置为控制信息所在的帧的帧号,SSB所在的时域位置为SSB所在的帧的帧号,SMTC所在的时域位置为SMTC所在的帧的帧号,在下面的介绍中,以控制信息所在的时域位置为控制信息所在的帧,SSB所在的时域位置为SSB所在的帧,SMTC所在的时域位置为SMTC所在的帧为例,且为了方便说明,以系统帧号SFN来表示每个帧。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the time domain location where the control information is located is the frame where the control information is located, the time domain location where the SSB is located is the frame where the SSB is located, and the time domain location where the SMTC is located is the frame where the SMTC is located; Or, the time domain location where the control information is located is the location of the frame where the control information is located, the time domain location where the SSB is located is the location of the frame where the SSB is located, and the time domain location where the SMTC is located is the location of the frame where the SMTC is located; or, the control information The time domain location is the frame number of the frame where the control information is located, the time domain location where the SSB is located is the frame number of the frame where the SSB is located, and the time domain location where the SMTC is located is the frame number of the frame where the SMTC is located, in the following description. The time domain of the control information is the frame where the control information is located, the time domain location where the SSB is located is the frame where the SSB is located, and the time domain location where the SMTC is located is the frame where the SMTC is located, and the system frame is used for convenience of description. No. SFN to represent each frame.
另外,需要说明的是,网络设备可以确定可用于向终端设备发送控制信息的一个或多个时域位置,网络设备可以选择其中一个时域位置向终端设备发送控制信息,而终端设备并不知道网络设备实际发送控制信息的时域位置,因此,终端设备确定的控制信息的时域位置为网络设备所有可能会发送控制信息的时域位置。In addition, it should be noted that the network device may determine one or more time domain locations that can be used to send control information to the terminal device, and the network device may select one of the time domain locations to send control information to the terminal device, and the terminal device does not know. The network device actually sends the time domain location of the control information. Therefore, the time domain location of the control information determined by the terminal device is a time domain location of all network device devices that may send control information.
终端设备的标识可以标记为UE_ID,其中,UE_ID可以为如下多种信息中的其中一种:可以为国际移动用户识别码(international mobile subscriber identification number,IMSI),或者为临时移动用户标识(Serving–Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity,S-TMSI),或者为IMSI与整数D进行取模运算得到的值,标记为(IMSI mod D),或者为S-TMSI与整数D进行取模运算得到的值,标记为(S-TMSI mod D),整数D可以为系统帧号的最大值加1,例如,D=1024。The identifier of the terminal device may be marked as UE_ID, where the UE_ID may be one of various information: may be an international mobile subscriber identification number (IMSI), or may be a temporary mobile subscriber identity (Serving– Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity, S-TMSI), or the value obtained by modulo the IMSI and the integer D, marked as (IMSI mod D), or the value obtained by modulo the S-TMSI and the integer D, marked as (S-TMSI mod D), the integer D can be incremented by one for the maximum value of the system frame number, for example, D=1024.
在本申请实施例中,步骤303可以包括但不限于如下三种确定方式,终端设备可以根据实际情况选择其中的一种方式进行确定。需要说明的是,无论采用下述三种确定方式中的何种方式确定控制信息所在的时域位置,都可以理解为是根据终端设备的标识和第一参数确定的,或者,可以理解为第二种确定方式或第三种确定方式为第一种确定方式的一种具体实现方式。In the embodiment of the present application, the step 303 may include, but is not limited to, the following three determining manners, and the terminal device may select one of the manners to determine according to actual conditions. It should be noted that, in any of the following three determination manners, determining the time domain location where the control information is located may be understood as being determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, or may be understood as the first The two determination methods or the third determination manner are one specific implementation manner of the first determination manner.
下面对三种确定方式进行介绍。The following three ways of determining are introduced.
第一种确定方式,以第一参数包含SSB所在的帧为例,具体实现方式如下:In the first method, the first parameter includes the frame where the SSB is located. The specific implementation is as follows:
终端设备根据终端设备的标识,确定控制信息所在的帧,在下面的介绍中,以终端设备的标识为UE_ID,该控制信息为Paging DCI为例。The terminal device determines the frame in which the control information is located according to the identifier of the terminal device. In the following description, the identifier of the terminal device is the UE_ID, and the control information is the Paging DCI.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备能够用于向终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧为SSB所在的帧中的一个帧或多个帧,如图5A所示,或者,网络设备能够用于向终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧为在距离SSB所在的帧的预设偏移位置内的帧中的一个帧或多个帧。该预设偏移位置可以是1帧,如图5B所示,当然,该预设偏移位置也可以是2帧等,在此不作限制。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device can be configured to send, to the terminal device, the frame where the paging DCI is located as one frame or multiple frames in the frame where the SSB is located, as shown in FIG. 5A, or the network device can be used to the terminal. The frame in which the device sends the Paging DCI is one or more frames in the frame within the preset offset position of the frame in which the SSB is located. The preset offset position may be 1 frame, as shown in FIG. 5B. Of course, the preset offset position may also be 2 frames or the like, which is not limited herein.
具体来讲,如图2所示的应用场景,在网络设备的覆盖范围内,存在多个终端设备,网络设备可用于向不同的终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧不相同。终端设备根据UE_ID,确定Paging DCI所在的帧。例如,在如图5A所示的多个用于发送Paging  DCI所在的帧中,第一个帧用于网络设备向UE_ID为0,4,8的终端设备发送Paging DCI,第二个帧用于网络设备向UE_ID为1,5,9的终端设备发送Paging DCI,以此类推。若终端设备的UE_ID为5,则终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的帧的SFN为5。Specifically, as shown in the application scenario of FIG. 2, a plurality of terminal devices exist in the coverage of the network device, and the network device may be configured to send different frames of the paging DCI to different terminal devices. The terminal device determines the frame in which the paging DCI is located according to the UE_ID. For example, in a plurality of frames for transmitting a paging DCI as shown in FIG. 5A, the first frame is used by the network device to send a Paging DCI to a terminal device with UE_IDs of 0, 4, 8, and the second frame is used for The network device sends a Paging DCI to the terminal device with UE_ID 1, 5, 9, and so on. If the UE_ID of the terminal device is 5, the terminal device determines that the SFN of the frame in which the paging DCI is located is 5.
需要说明的是,由图5A所示,Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧之间的间隔也可以为0,因此,在本申请实施例中,对Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧之间的间隔的取值不作限制。It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 5A, the interval between the frame where the Paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located may also be 0. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the frame where the Paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located. The value of the interval between them is not limited.
另外,需要说明的是,当以第一参数包含SMTC所在的帧时,终端设备根据SMTC所在的帧确定Paging DCI的帧的方法与上述方法相同,在此不再赘述。可选的,当第一参数包含SMTC所在的帧时,SSB所在的帧位于SMTC所在的帧内。In addition, it should be noted that, when the first parameter includes the frame in which the SMTC is located, the method for determining the frame of the paging DCI according to the frame in which the SMTC is located is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again. Optionally, when the first parameter includes the frame where the SMTC is located, the frame where the SSB is located is located in the frame where the SMTC is located.
第二种确定方式,以第一参数包含SSB所在的帧为例,具体实现方式如下:The second method is as follows: The first parameter includes the frame where the SSB is located. The specific implementation is as follows:
在本申请实施例中,控制信息所在的时域位置与SSB所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据终端设备的标识确定。在下面的介绍中,以终端设备的标识为UE_ID,该控制信息为Paging DCI为例。In the embodiment of the present application, the interval between the time domain location where the control information is located and the time domain location where the SSB is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device. In the following description, the identifier of the terminal device is the UE_ID, and the control information is the Paging DCI.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备能够用于向终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧为SSB所在的帧中的一个帧或多个帧,如图5C所示,或者,网络设备能够用于向终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧为在距离SSB所在的帧的预设偏移位置内的帧中的一个帧或多个帧。该预设偏移位置可以是1帧,如图5D所示,当然,该预设偏移位置也可以是2帧等,在此不作限制。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device can be configured to send, to the terminal device, the frame where the paging DCI is located as one frame or multiple frames in the frame where the SSB is located, as shown in FIG. 5C, or the network device can be used to the terminal. The frame in which the device sends the Paging DCI is one or more frames in the frame within the preset offset position of the frame in which the SSB is located. The preset offset position may be 1 frame, as shown in FIG. 5D. Of course, the preset offset position may also be 2 frames or the like, which is not limited herein.
具体来讲,如图2所示的应用场景,在网络设备的覆盖范围内,存在多个终端设备,网络设备可用于向不同终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧不相同。终端设备根据UE_ID,确定Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧之间的间隔。例如,在如图5C所示的多个Paging DCI所在的帧中,第一个帧与SSB所在的帧之间的间隔为0,第一个帧用于网络设备向UE_ID为0,4的终端设备发送Paging DCI,第二个帧与SSB所在的帧之间的间隔为2帧,第二个帧用于网络设备向UE_ID为2,6的终端设备发送Paging DCI,以此类推。若终端设备的UE_ID为6,则终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧之间的间隔为2帧,从而终端设备确定Paging DCI的帧为图5C中的第二个帧。Specifically, as shown in the application scenario of FIG. 2, a plurality of terminal devices exist in the coverage of the network device, and the network device can be used to send different frames of the paging DCI to different terminal devices. The terminal device determines the interval between the frame where the paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located according to the UE_ID. For example, in the frame where multiple paging DCIs are located as shown in FIG. 5C, the interval between the first frame and the frame where the SSB is located is 0, and the first frame is used for the terminal of the network device to UE_ID 0, 4. The device sends a Paging DCI. The interval between the second frame and the frame where the SSB is located is 2 frames. The second frame is used by the network device to send the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, and so on. If the UE_ID of the terminal device is 6, the terminal device determines that the interval between the frame where the paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located is 2 frames, so that the terminal device determines that the frame of the paging DCI is the second frame in FIG. 5C.
需要说明的是,由图5C所示,Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧之间的间隔也可以为0,因此,在本申请实施例中,对Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧之间的间隔的取值不作限制。It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 5C, the interval between the frame where the Paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located may also be 0. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the frame where the Paging DCI is located and the frame where the SSB is located. The value of the interval between them is not limited.
另外,需要说明的是,当以第一参数包含SMTC所在的帧时,终端设备根据SMTC所在的帧确定Paging DCI的帧的方法与上述方法相同,在此不再赘述。可选的,当第一参数包含SMTC所在的帧时,SSB所在的帧位于SMTC所在的帧内。In addition, it should be noted that, when the first parameter includes the frame in which the SMTC is located, the method for determining the frame of the paging DCI according to the frame in which the SMTC is located is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again. Optionally, when the first parameter includes the frame where the SMTC is located, the frame where the SSB is located is located in the frame where the SMTC is located.
第三种确定方式:The third way to determine:
在本申请实施例中,所述第一参数还包含第一同步信号块的索引和/或终端设备监测控制信息的周期。需要说明的是,第一同步信号块即为网络设备发送的同步信号块,或第一同步信号块为终端设备监测或接收的同步信号块。当第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置时,第一同步信号块所在的时域位置可以位于同步信号块测量时间内。在这种情况下,第一参数中包含多个参数,即第一参数为一个参数集合。In this embodiment, the first parameter further includes an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or a period of the terminal device monitoring control information. It should be noted that the first synchronization signal block is a synchronization signal block sent by the network device, or the first synchronization signal block is a synchronization signal block that is monitored or received by the terminal device. When the first parameter includes the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located may be within the synchronization signal block measurement time. In this case, the first parameter includes multiple parameters, that is, the first parameter is a parameter set.
下面对终端设备监测控制信息的周期进行说明。The period of monitoring the control information of the terminal device will be described below.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备监测控制信息的周期,可以标记为T,其中,T可以为终端设备的非连续接收周期DRX cycle,T可以是网络设备配置的,也可以是终端设备确定的,例如,终端设备在进行RRC连接过程中,将终端设备确定的监测或接收寻呼消息Paging的周期上报给网络设备,T也可以是根据网络设备配置的值和终端设备确定的值确定的,例如,T为网络设备配置的值与终端设备确定的值之中的较大值或者较小值,例如,网络设备配置的值为T1,终端设备确定的值为T2,则T=min(T1,T2),或者T=max(T1,T2),当然,T也可以是根据网络设备配置的值与终端设备确定的值进行其他运算,例如取模运算等,得到的值,在此不作限制。在具体实施过程中,T的取值可以为32、64、128以及256中的其中一种。In the embodiment of the present application, the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information may be marked as T, where T may be a discontinuous reception period DRX cycle of the terminal device, where T may be configured by the network device or determined by the terminal device. For example, the terminal device reports the period of monitoring or receiving the paging message determined by the terminal device to the network device during the RRC connection process, and the T may be determined according to the value of the network device configuration and the value determined by the terminal device. For example, T is a larger value or a smaller value among the value configured by the network device and the value determined by the terminal device, for example, the value of the network device configuration is T1, and the value determined by the terminal device is T2, then T=min (T1) , T2), or T = max (T1, T2), of course, T can also be based on the value of the network device configuration and the value determined by the terminal device for other operations, such as modulo operations, etc., the value obtained, no restrictions here . In a specific implementation process, the value of T may be one of 32, 64, 128, and 256.
下面对第三种确定方式的具体实现方式进行说明。The specific implementation manner of the third determination mode will be described below.
在这种确定方式下,确定控制信息所在的时域位置可以包含但不限于如下两种实现方式:In this determination mode, determining the time domain location where the control information is located may include, but is not limited to, the following two implementation manners:
第一种实现方式:The first way to achieve:
在这种实现方式下,以第一参数包含SSB所在的时域位置及SSB的索引为例,在下面的介绍中,以终端设备的标识为UE_ID,该控制信息为Paging DCI为例。网络设备能够用于向终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧为SSB所在的帧中的一个帧或多个帧,如图5A或图5B所示,在此不再赘述。In this implementation, the first parameter includes the time domain location where the SSB is located and the index of the SSB. In the following description, the identifier of the terminal device is the UE_ID, and the control information is the Paging DCI. The network device can be used to send the frame where the paging DCI is located to the terminal device as one frame or multiple frames in the frame where the SSB is located, as shown in FIG. 5A or FIG. 5B, and details are not described herein again.
具体来讲,如图2所示的应用场景,在网络设备的覆盖范围内,存在多个终端设备,网络设备可用于向不同终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧不相同,即当终端设备的UE_ID及SSB的索引不相同时,网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧不同。例如,在如图5A所示的多个用于发送Paging DCI所在的帧中,当SSB的索引为n 0,则第一个帧用于向UE_ID为0,4的终端设备发送Paging DCI,当SSB的索引为n 1,则第二个帧用于向UE_ID为0,4的终端设备发送Paging DCI;当SSB的索引为n 0,第三个帧用于向UE_ID为2,6的终端设备发送Paging DCI,当SSB的索引为n 1,第四个帧用于向UE_ID为2,6的终端设备发送Paging DCI,以此类推。若SSB的索引为n 0且终端设备的UE_ID为6,则终端设备确定Paging DCI的帧为图5C中的第三个帧。 Specifically, as shown in the application scenario of FIG. 2, in the coverage of the network device, there are multiple terminal devices, and the network device can be used to send different frames of the paging DCI to different terminal devices, that is, when the UE_ID of the terminal device is When the index of the SSB is different, the network device sends a different frame to the terminal device where the paging DCI is located. For example, in a frame for transmitting a paging DCI as shown in FIG. 5A, when the index of the SSB is n 0 , the first frame is used to send a Paging DCI to a terminal device with a UE_ID of 0, 4, when The index of the SSB is n 1 , and the second frame is used to send the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 0, 4; when the index of the SSB is n 0 , the third frame is used for the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6. The Paging DCI is sent. When the index of the SSB is n 1 , the fourth frame is used to send the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, and so on. If the index of the SSB is n 0 and the UE_ID of the terminal device is 6, the terminal device determines that the frame of the paging DCI is the third frame in FIG. 5C.
需要说明的是,当第一参数包含其他参数,例如第一参数包含SSB所在的时域位置及终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期,或者第一参数包含SSB所在的时域位置、SSB的索引及终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期时,终端设备确定控制信息的时域位置方法与上述方法相同,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that, when the first parameter includes other parameters, for example, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the SSB is located and a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, or the first parameter includes a time domain location where the SSB is located, and an index of the SSB. When the terminal device monitors the period of the control information, the method for determining the time domain location of the control information by the terminal device is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again.
另外,需要说明的是,当以第一参数包含SMTC所在的帧时,终端设备根据SMTC所在的帧确定Paging DCI的帧的方法与上述方法相同,在此不再赘述。In addition, it should be noted that, when the first parameter includes the frame in which the SMTC is located, the method for determining the frame of the paging DCI according to the frame in which the SMTC is located is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again.
第二种实现方式:The second way to achieve:
在这种实现方式下,控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,该第一时域位置为根据终端设备的标识以及终端设备监测控制信息的周期确定的,该偏移量为根据第二参数确定的,其中,该第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:In this implementation manner, the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain location after the offset is increased by the first time domain location, where the first time domain location is based on the identifier of the terminal device and the terminal device monitoring control information. The period determined by the period is determined according to the second parameter, wherein the second parameter comprises at least one of the following parameters:
SSB所在的帧;The frame where the SSB is located;
SMTC所在的帧;The frame where the SMTC is located;
SSB的索引;SSB index;
终端设备的标识。The identification of the terminal device.
在本申请实施例中,第一时域位置及偏移量的单位可以均为帧。在下面的介绍中,以终端设备的标识为终端设备的UE_ID、控制信息为Paging DCI以及终端设备监测控制信息的周期为T为例,进行说明。In the embodiment of the present application, the units of the first time domain position and the offset may be all frames. In the following description, the UE_ID of the terminal device, the control information is the paging DCI, and the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information is T is taken as an example for description.
下面介绍终端设备根据终端设备的UE_ID以及终端设备监测Paging DCI的周期T确定第一时域位置的过程。在该实现方式中,第一时域位置为帧号为SFN_1的帧,具体确定方法如下:The process of determining the first time domain location by the terminal device according to the UE_ID of the terminal device and the period T of the terminal device monitoring the paging DCI is described below. In this implementation manner, the first time domain location is a frame with the frame number SFN_1, and the specific determination method is as follows:
终端设备根据终端设备监测Paging DCI的周期以及终端设备的标识UE_ID,确定第一时域位置SFN_1的具体计算方法满足如下表达式:The terminal device determines that the specific calculation method of the first time domain location SFN_1 satisfies the following expression according to the period in which the terminal device monitors the paging DCI and the identifier UE_ID of the terminal device:
SFN_1mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)      (1)SFN_1mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N) (1)
需要说明的是,在这种方式下,该第一参数还包含第三参数,该第三参数可以为参数nB,其中,N=min(T,nB)。在下面的介绍中以第三参数为参数nB为例。It should be noted that, in this manner, the first parameter further includes a third parameter, and the third parameter may be the parameter nB, where N=min(T, nB). In the following description, the third parameter is taken as the parameter nB as an example.
在一种可能的实现方式中,参数nB的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,该第一周期为该同步信号块的周期或该同步信号块测量时间的周期,该第四参数为控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。In a possible implementation manner, the maximum value of the parameter nB is determined according to the first period or the fourth parameter, where the first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is The interval at which the monitoring space of the control information is monitored.
可选的,第一参数包含SSB所在的时域位置,第三参数的最大值根据SSB的周期或第四参数确定;第一参数包含SMTC所在的时域位置,第三参数的最大值根据SMTC的周期或第四参数确定。Optionally, the first parameter includes a time domain location where the SSB is located, and the maximum value of the third parameter is determined according to a period of the SSB or a fourth parameter; the first parameter includes a time domain location where the SMTC is located, and the maximum value of the third parameter is according to the SMTC. The period or the fourth parameter is determined.
在本申请实施例中,控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔,也可以称为控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的周期,控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔可以是网络设备配置的,也可以是预先定义的。例如,间隔可以固定是20ms或者可以等于SSB的周期。In the embodiment of the present application, the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information may also be referred to as the period of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information, and the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information may be configured by the network device. It can also be pre-defined. For example, the interval may be fixed to be 20 ms or may be equal to the period of the SSB.
通过限制参数nB的最大值,从而使通过公式(1)确定的Paging DCI所在的帧可以与第一周期或第四参数相接近,从而可以避免终端设备根据SSB进行下行同步后,需要经过较长的时间才能接收Paging DCI,导致下行同步的有效性降低,可以提高终端设备在接收Paging DCI时通过SSB进行下行同步的有效性。By limiting the maximum value of the parameter nB, the frame in which the Paging DCI determined by the formula (1) is located may be close to the first period or the fourth parameter, so that the terminal device may need to be long after performing downlink synchronization according to the SSB. The Paging DCI can be received in time to reduce the effectiveness of the downlink synchronization, which can improve the effectiveness of the downlink synchronization of the terminal device through the SSB when receiving the paging DCI.
下面以第一参数包含SSB所在的时域位置,参数nB的最大值根据SSB的周期或第四参数确定为例,对参数nB的最大值进行说明:The first parameter includes the time domain location where the SSB is located, and the maximum value of the parameter nB is determined according to the period of the SSB or the fourth parameter, and the maximum value of the parameter nB is described:
第一种情况,nB的最大值为终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期T与SSB的周期的比值,即,nB的最大值为T/(SSB的周期)。其中,SSB的周期的单位与终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期T单位的周期相同,当终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期T的单位为帧时,SSB的周期的单位为帧。In the first case, the maximum value of nB is a ratio of the period T of the terminal device monitoring the control information to the period of the SSB, that is, the maximum value of nB is T/(the period of the SSB). The unit of the period of the SSB is the same as the period of the period T unit in which the terminal device monitors the control information. When the unit of the period T of the control information monitored by the terminal device is a frame, the unit of the period of the SSB is a frame.
第二种情况,nB的最大值为终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期T与第四参数的比值,即,nB的最大值为T/(第四参数)。其中,第四参数的单位与终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期T单位的周期相同,当终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期T的单位为帧时,第四参数的单位为帧。In the second case, the maximum value of nB is a ratio of the period T of the terminal device monitoring the control information to the fourth parameter, that is, the maximum value of nB is T/(fourth parameter). The unit of the fourth parameter is the same as the period of the period T unit in which the terminal device monitors the control information. When the unit of the period T of the control information monitored by the terminal device is a frame, the unit of the fourth parameter is a frame.
以控制信息为Paging DCI为例,可选的,当SSB的周期小于或等于Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔时,nB的最大值为T/Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔;当SSB的周期大于Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔时,nB的最大值为T/(SSB的周期)或T/Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。Taking the control information as the Paging DCI as an example, optionally, when the period of the SSB is less than or equal to the interval of the monitoring occasion of the search space of the Paging DCI, the maximum value of nB is the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the T/Paging DCI; When the period of the SSB is greater than the interval of the monitoring timing of the search space of the Paging DCI, the maximum value of nB is T/(the period of the SSB) or the interval of the monitoring timing of the search space of the T/Paging DCI.
由于参数nB由网络设备配置,网络设备配置的参数nB的取值为nB的可选取值中不超过前述确定的nB的最大值的一个取值,例如nB的取值T或T/8等。Since the parameter nB is configured by the network device, the value of the parameter nB of the network device configuration is not more than a value of the maximum value of the nB determined in the foregoing, for example, the value of nB is T or T/8. .
通过上述方式,Paging DCI所在的帧的周期大于等于SSB的周期,因此,Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧相接近。In the above manner, the period of the frame in which the paging DCI is located is greater than or equal to the period of the SSB. Therefore, the frame in which the paging DCI is located is close to the frame in which the SSB is located.
具体来讲,若通过第一种情况确定nB的最大值,当SSB的周期>=1帧时,由于nB的最大值为T/(SSB的周期),根据N=min(T,nB),则终端设备的Paging DCI的周期,标记为T/N,T/N的最小值为max(SSB的周期,1帧),从而可以得出网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧的周期大于或等于SSB的周期。如图6A中所示,以SSB的周期为0.5帧,T=32,nB=T为例,根据公式(1)得出,网络设备向UE_ID为0,32,64,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 0;网络设备向UE_ID为1,33,65,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 1;网络设备向UE_ID为2,34,66,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 2,以此类推。在图6A中,网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧相接近。Specifically, if the maximum value of nB is determined by the first case, when the period of the SSB is >=1 frame, since the maximum value of nB is T/(the period of the SSB), according to N=min(T, nB), Then, the period of the Paging DCI of the terminal device is marked as T/N, and the minimum value of T/N is max (the period of the SSB, 1 frame), so that the period in which the network device sends the frame in which the paging DCI is located to the terminal device can be obtained. Greater than or equal to the period of the SSB. As shown in FIG. 6A, taking the period of the SSB as 0.5 frames, T=32, and nB=T as an example, according to the formula (1), the network device sends a Paging to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 0, 32, 64, . In the DCI, the SFN is SFN 0; when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 1, 33, 65, ..., the SFN is SFN 1; the network device sends the Paging to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 34, 66, ... In DCI, SFN is SFN 2, and so on. In FIG. 6A, the network device sends the frame where the paging DCI is located to the terminal device and is close to the frame where the SSB is located.
当SSB的周期<1帧时,由于nB的最大值为T/(SSB的周期),根据Ns=max(1,nB/T),一个帧中至多有(1/SSB的周期)个用于发送Paging DCI的时机,因此,T/N的最小值为max(SSB的周期,1帧),从而可以得出网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧的周期大于等于SSB的周期。如图6B所示,以SSB的周期为8帧,T=32,nB=T/8为例,根据公式(1)得出,网络设备向UE_ID为0,4,8,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 0,32,…;网络设备向UE_ID为1,5,9,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 8,40,…;网络设备向UE_ID为2,6,10,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 16,48,…,以此类推。在图6B中,网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧的间隔大约为SSB的周期的一半,实现了网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧相接近。When the period of the SSB is <1 frame, since the maximum value of nB is T/(the period of the SSB), according to Ns=max(1, nB/T), at most one (1/SSB period) is used in one frame. The timing of sending the Paging DCI, therefore, the minimum value of T/N is max (the period of the SSB, 1 frame), so that it can be concluded that the period in which the network device sends the frame in which the paging DCI is located to the terminal device is greater than or equal to the SSB. As shown in FIG. 6B, taking the SSB period as 8 frames, T=32, and nB=T/8 as an example, according to formula (1), the network device sends to the terminal device with UE_ID 0, 4, 8, . When Paging DCI, SFN is SFN 0, 32, ...; when the network device sends Paging DCI to the terminal device with UE_ID 1, 5, 9, ..., SFN is SFN 8, 40, ...; network device to UE_ID is 2, 6 When the terminal device of 10, ... sends the Paging DCI, the SFN is SFN 16, 48, ..., and so on. In FIG. 6B, the interval between the frame in which the network device sends the paging DCI and the frame in which the SSB is located is about half of the period of the SSB, and the network device sends the frame where the paging DCI is located and the SSB to the terminal device. The frames are close.
若通过第二种情况确定nB的最大值,当SSB的周期小于或等于Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔,且当Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔>=1时,由于nB的最大值为T/Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔,根据N=min(T,nB),则终端设备的Paging DCI的周期,标记为T/N,T/N的最小值为max(SSB的周期,1帧),从而可以得出网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧的周期大于或等于SSB的周期。如图6C中所示,以SSB的周期为1帧,Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔为2帧,T=32,nB=T/2为例,根据公式(1)得出,网络设备向UE_ID为0,16,32,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 0;网络设备向UE_ID为1,17,33,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 2;网络设备向UE_ID为2,18,34,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 4,以此类推。在图6C中,网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB所在的帧相接近。If the maximum value of nB is determined by the second case, when the period of the SSB is less than or equal to the interval of the monitoring timing of the search space of the Paging DCI, and when the interval of the monitoring timing of the search space of the Paging DCI is >=1, due to nB The maximum value is the interval of the monitoring time of the search space of the T/Paging DCI. According to N=min(T, nB), the period of the Paging DCI of the terminal device is marked as T/N, and the minimum value of T/N is max ( The period of the SSB, 1 frame), so that the period during which the network device sends the frame in which the paging DCI is located to the terminal device is greater than or equal to the SSB. As shown in FIG. 6C, the period of the SSB is 1 frame, and the interval of the monitoring time of the search space of the Paging DCI is 2 frames, T=32, nB=T/2 is taken as an example, according to the formula (1), the network When the device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 0, 16, 32, ..., the SFN is SFN 0; when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 1, 17, 33, ..., the SFN is SFN 2; When the device sends a Paging DCI to a terminal device with UE_IDs of 2, 18, 34, ..., the SFN is SFN 4, and so on. In FIG. 6C, the network device sends the frame where the paging DCI is located to the terminal device and is close to the frame where the SSB is located.
当SSB的周期小于或等于Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔,且当Paging  DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔<1时,由于nB的最大值为T/(Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔),根据Ns=max(1,nB/T),一个帧中至多有(1/Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔)个用于发送Paging DCI的时机,因此,T/N的最小值为max(Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔,1帧),从而可以得出网络设备向该终端设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧的周期大于等于SSB的周期。When the period of the SSB is less than or equal to the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the Paging DCI, and when the interval of the monitoring time of the search space of the Paging DCI is <1, since the maximum value of the nB is T/(the monitoring of the search space of the Paging DCI) Timing interval), according to Ns=max(1, nB/T), there is at most one (the interval of the monitoring occasion of the search space of the 1/Paging DCI) in one frame, and the timing for transmitting the paging DCI, therefore, T/N The minimum value is max (the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the paging DCI, 1 frame), so that the period in which the network device sends the frame in which the paging DCI is located to the terminal device is greater than or equal to the SSB period.
当SSB的周期大于Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔时,则与第一种情况相同,在此不再赘述。When the period of the SSB is greater than the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the Paging DCI, it is the same as the first case, and details are not described herein again.
需要说明的是,参数nB的最大值与SSB的周期相关,还是与第四参数相关,可以根据SSB的周期的大小确定。例如,当SSB的周期大于或等于某一阈值时,参数nB的最大值与SSB的周期相关,当SSB的周期小于该阈值时,参数nB的最大值与第四参数相关,该阈值的取值在此不作限制。It should be noted that the maximum value of the parameter nB is related to the period of the SSB or related to the fourth parameter, and can be determined according to the size of the period of the SSB. For example, when the period of the SSB is greater than or equal to a certain threshold, the maximum value of the parameter nB is related to the period of the SSB. When the period of the SSB is less than the threshold, the maximum value of the parameter nB is related to the fourth parameter, and the value of the threshold is There are no restrictions here.
另外,需要说明的是,在上述实现方式中,当第一参数为SMTC的周期时,终端设备确定控制信息所在的帧与上述方法相同,在此不再赘述。In addition, it should be noted that, in the above implementation manner, when the first parameter is the period of the SMTC, the terminal device determines that the frame where the control information is located is the same as the foregoing method, and details are not described herein again.
下面对偏移量的确定方式进行说明。The manner of determining the offset will be described below.
在本申请实施例中,根据用于确定偏移量的参数的不同,偏移量的确定方式也不一样,具体如下。In the embodiment of the present application, the manner of determining the offset is different according to different parameters for determining the offset, as follows.
(1)根据SMTC所在的帧确定偏移量。(1) Determine the offset according to the frame in which the SMTC is located.
在本申请实施例中,将根据SMTC所在的帧确定的偏移量标记为Offset_SMTC。根据SMTC所在的帧确定Offset_SMTC的方式包含但不限于如下几种。In the embodiment of the present application, the offset determined according to the frame in which the SMTC is located is marked as Offset_SMTC. The manner of determining the Offset_SMTC according to the frame in which the SMTC is located includes but is not limited to the following.
第一种,终端设备根据SMTC所在的帧确定Offset_SMTC的计算方法满足如下表达式:First, the terminal device determines that the calculation method of Offset_SMTC according to the frame in which the SMTC is located satisfies the following expression:
Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L;      (2)Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L; (2)
其中,SFN_SMTC为SMTC所在的帧的帧号SFN的最小值,或,SFN_SMTC为从SFN 0开始第一个SMTC所在的帧的SFN,或,SFN_SMTC为从SFN 0开始第一个SMTC所在的帧距离SFN 0的偏移值,该偏移值以帧为单位。例如,SMTC所在的帧的周期为8个帧,且SMTC所在的帧的SFN依次为SFN 3,SFN 11,SFN 19,…,则SFN_SMTC=3,如图7A所示。The SFN_SMTC is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the SMTC is located, or SFN_SMTC is the SFN of the frame in which the first SMTC is located from SFN 0, or SFN_SMTC is the frame distance of the first SMTC from SFN 0 The offset value of SFN 0, which is in frames. For example, the period of the frame in which the SMTC is located is 8 frames, and the SFN of the frame in which the SMTC is located is SFN 3, SFN 11, SFN 19, ..., and SFN_SMTC=3, as shown in FIG. 7A.
L为整数,可以为0,或正整数,或负整数,或奇数,或偶数。L的确定方式有多种,例如,L可以是预先定义的,也可以是网络设备和终端设备预先约定的,也可以是由网络设备配置的,也可以是由网络设备根据其他参数,例如,控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔确定的,L也可以根据满足如下表达式的计算方法确定:L is an integer and can be 0, or a positive integer, or a negative integer, or an odd number, or an even number. L can be determined in various ways. For example, L may be pre-defined, or may be pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal device, may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the network device according to other parameters, for example, The interval of the monitoring timing of the search space of the control information is determined, and L can also be determined according to a calculation method that satisfies the following expression:
L=B+((SFN_SMTC+C)modA);        (3)L=B+((SFN_SMTC+C)modA); (3)
其中,A,B和C为整数。例如,A的取值可以为2,B的取值可以为1,C的取值可以为-1,则得到L的表达式为:L=1+((SFN_SMTC-1)mod 2)。Wherein A, B and C are integers. For example, the value of A may be 2, the value of B may be 1, and the value of C may be -1, and the expression of L is: L=1+((SFN_SMTC-1) mod 2).
当然,L也可以采用其他确定方法,在此不作限制。L可以调整用于发送Paging DCI所在的帧与SMTC所在的帧之间的间隔。Of course, L can also adopt other determination methods, and is not limited herein. L can adjust the interval between the frame in which the Paging DCI is located and the frame in which the SMTC is located.
第二种,终端设备根据SMTC所在的帧确定Offset_SMTC的计算方法满足如下表达式:Second, the terminal device determines that the calculation method of Offset_SMTC according to the frame in which the SMTC is located satisfies the following expression:
Offset_SMTC=floor((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B;     (4)Offset_SMTC=floor((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B; (4)
其中,SFN_SMTC与第一种中相同,在此不再赘述。The SFN_SMTC is the same as the first one, and is not described here.
B为正整数,B的确定方式有多种,例如,B可以是预先定义的,也可以是网络设备和终端设备预先约定的,也可以是由网络设备配置的,也可以是由网络设备根据其他参数,例如,控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔确定的,例如,B的取值等于Paging DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔,单位为帧。B is a positive integer, and B is determined in various ways. For example, B may be pre-defined, or may be pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal device, may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the network device. Other parameters, for example, the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the control information, for example, the value of B is equal to the interval of the monitoring opportunity of the search space of the Paging DCI, and the unit is a frame.
L为整数,可以为0,或正整数,或负整数,或奇数,或偶数。L可以是预先定义的,也可以是网络设备和终端设备预先约定的,也可以是由网络设备配置的,当然,也可以是采用其他方式确定的,在此不作限制。例如,B的取值为2,L的取值为1,得到Offset_SMTC的计算方法为:Offset_SMTC=floor((SFN_SMTC+1)/2)*2。L is an integer and can be 0, or a positive integer, or a negative integer, or an odd number, or an even number. L may be pre-defined, or may be pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal device, or may be configured by the network device, and may be determined in other manners, and is not limited herein. For example, the value of B is 2, the value of L is 1, and the calculation method for obtaining Offset_SMTC is: Offset_SMTC=floor((SFN_SMTC+1)/2)*2.
第三种,终端设备根据SMTC所在的帧确定Offset_SMTC的计算方法满足如下表达式:Third, the terminal device determines that the calculation method of Offset_SMTC according to the frame in which the SMTC is located satisfies the following expression:
Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B;      (5)Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B; (5)
其中,SFN_SMTC与第一种中相同,B和L的取值与第二种中相同,在此不再赘述。ceil()函数为向上取整的函数。当B的取值为2,L的取值为1,得到Offset_SMTC的计算方法为:Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC+1)/2)*2。当B的取值为2,L的取值为0,得到Offset_SMTC的计算方法为:Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC)/2)*2。The SFN_SMTC is the same as the first one, and the values of B and L are the same as those in the second type, and are not described here. The ceil() function is a rounded up function. When the value of B is 2 and the value of L is 1, the method for obtaining Offset_SMTC is: Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC+1)/2)*2. When the value of B is 2 and the value of L is 0, the calculation method for obtaining Offset_SMTC is: Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC)/2)*2.
第四种,确定Offset_SMTC为第一个SMTC所在的帧之后的第L个控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机所在的帧的帧号,或,确定Offset_SMTC为第一个SMTC所在的帧之前的第L个控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机所在的帧的帧号。在本申请实施例中,第一个SMTC所在的帧也可以理解为SMTC所在的帧的帧号的最小的SMTC。其中,L为0或正整数,L可以是预先定义的,也可以是网络设备和终端设备预先约定的,也可以是由网络设备配置的,在此不作限制。Fourth, determining that Offset_SMTC is the frame number of the frame in which the monitoring space of the search space of the Lth control information after the frame in which the first SMTC is located, or determining that Offset_SMTC is the L before the frame in which the first SMTC is located The frame number of the frame in which the monitoring space of the control information is located. In the embodiment of the present application, the frame in which the first SMTC is located may also be understood as the smallest SMTC of the frame number of the frame in which the SMTC is located. L is 0 or a positive integer, and L may be pre-defined, or may be pre-agreed by the network device or the terminal device, or may be configured by the network device, and is not limited herein.
当确定偏移量后,则根据第一时域位置和偏移量Offset_SMTC,确定Paging DCI所在的时域位置为第一时域位置加上偏移量Offset_SMTC的时域位置。终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的帧的帧号为SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC)mod Num_SFN,或者,SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset_SMTC)mod T,或者,(SFN-Offset_SMTC)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N),或者,(SFN+Offset_SMTC)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)。在本申请实施例中,SFN的数量标记为Num_SFN,可选的,Num_SFN=SFN的最大值+1。After determining the offset, the time domain location where the Paging DCI is located is determined to be the first time domain location plus the time domain location of the offset Offset_SMTC according to the first time domain location and the offset Offset_SMTC. The terminal device determines that the frame number of the frame in which the paging DCI is located is SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC) mod Num_SFN, or SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset_SMTC) mod T, or, (SFN -Offset_SMTC) mod T = (T / N) × (UE_ID mod N), or, (SFN + Offset_SMTC) mod T = (T / N) × (UE_ID mod N). In the embodiment of the present application, the number of SFNs is marked as Num_SFN, and optionally, the maximum value of Num_SFN=SFN is +1.
如图7B所示,以SMTC的周期为8,T=32帧,nB=T/8,SFN_SMTC=4,L=0为例,根据公式(1)计算SFN_1,得到网络设备向UE_ID为0,4,8,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN_1为SFN 0,32,…,网络设备向UE_ID为1,5,9,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN_1为SFN 8,40,…,网络设备向UE_ID为2,6,10,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN_1为SFN 16,48,…,以此类推。由图7B中的第二条时间轴上的发送Paging DCI所在的帧可知,通过公式(1)计算SFN_1与SMTC所在的帧距离较远。As shown in FIG. 7B, with the SMTC period of 8, T=32 frames, nB=T/8, SFN_SMTC=4, L=0 as an example, the SFN_1 is calculated according to the formula (1), and the network device is obtained with the UE_ID being 0. When the terminal device of 4, 8, ... sends the Paging DCI, SFN_1 is SFN 0, 32, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 1, 5, 9, ..., SFN_1 is SFN 8, 40,... When the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, ..., SFN_1 is SFN 16, 48, ..., and so on. It can be seen from the frame in which the Paging DCI is transmitted on the second time axis in FIG. 7B that the distance between the SFN_1 and the frame where the SMTC is located is calculated by the formula (1).
根据Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L得出Offset_SMTC=4。然后,根据公式SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC)mod Num_SFN得到,网络设备向UE_ID为0,4,8,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 4,36,…,网络设备向UE_ID为1,5,9,…的终 端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 12,44,…,网络设备向UE_ID为2,6,10,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 20,52,…,以此类推。由图7B中的第三条时间轴上的发送Paging DCI所在的帧与SMTC所在的帧可知,根据公式SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC)mod Num_SFN确定的SFN与SMTC所在的帧距离重合。这样,终端设备可以在一次醒来的过程中,完成在SMTC所在的帧内进行SS-RSRP及SS-RSRQ测量,以及对Paging DCI的监测和/或接收过程。According to Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L, Offset_SMTC=4 is obtained. Then, according to the formula SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC) mod Num_SFN, when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 0, 4, 8, ..., the SFN is SFN 4, 36, ..., and the network device has a UE_ID of 1 When the terminal device of 5, 9, ... sends the Paging DCI, the SFN is SFN 12, 44, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, ..., the SFN is SFN 20, 52, ..., and so on. It can be seen from the frame in which the Paging DCI is transmitted on the third time axis in FIG. 7B and the frame in which the SMTC is located, and the SFN determined according to the formula SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC) mod Num_SFN coincides with the frame distance in which the SMTC is located. In this way, the terminal device can complete the SS-RSRP and SS-RSRQ measurement in the frame in which the SMTC is located, and the monitoring and/or receiving process of the Paging DCI in a wake-up process.
(2)根据SSB所在的帧确定偏移量。(2) Determine the offset according to the frame in which the SSB is located.
根据SSB所在的帧确定偏移量的过程与(1)中根据SMTC所在的帧确定偏移量相同,其中,SFN_SMTC为SSB所在的帧的帧号SFN的最小值,或,SFN_SMTC为从SFN 0开始第一个SSB所在的帧的SFN,或,SFN_SMTC为从SFN 0开始第一个SSB所在的帧距离SFN 0的偏移值,该偏移值以帧为单位。在第四种方法中,确定Offset_SMTC为第一个SSB所在的帧之后的第L个控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机所在的帧的帧号,或,确定Offset_SMTC为第一个SSB所在的帧之前的第L个控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机所在的帧的帧号。在本申请实施例中,第一个SSB所在的帧也可以理解为SSB所在的帧的帧号的最小的SSB。在此不再赘述。The process of determining the offset according to the frame in which the SSB is located is the same as the offset determined according to the frame in which the SMTC is located in (1), where SFN_SMTC is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the SSB is located, or SFN_SMTC is the slave SFN 0. Start the SFN of the frame where the first SSB is located, or SFN_SMTC is the offset value of the frame distance SFN 0 where the first SSB is located from SFN 0, and the offset value is in units of frames. In the fourth method, it is determined that Offset_SMTC is the frame number of the frame in which the monitoring time of the search space of the Lth control information after the frame in which the first SSB is located, or before determining that Offset_SMTC is the frame in which the first SSB is located The frame number of the frame in which the search space of the Lth control information is located. In the embodiment of the present application, the frame in which the first SSB is located may also be understood as the smallest SSB of the frame number of the frame in which the SSB is located. I will not repeat them here.
(3)根据终端设备的UE_ID确定偏移量。(3) Determine the offset according to the UE_ID of the terminal device.
在本申请实施例中,将根据终端设备的UE_ID确定的偏移量标记为Offset_UE。根据终端设备的UE_ID确定Offset_UE的方式包含但不限于如下方式:In the embodiment of the present application, the offset determined according to the UE_ID of the terminal device is marked as Offset_UE. The manner of determining Offset_UE according to the UE_ID of the terminal device includes but is not limited to the following manners:
终端设备根据终端设备的UE_ID确定Offset_UE的计算方法满足如下表达式:The calculation method of the terminal device determining the Offset_UE according to the UE_ID of the terminal device satisfies the following expression:
Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)modE);        (6)Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)modE); (6)
其中,E为在第一时域位置附近用于发送控制信息的帧的个数,若第一时域位置为网络设备根据SSB所在的帧确定的,则E则为在SSB所在的帧附近用于发送控制信息的帧的个数。E,G和I可以为预先定义的,也可以是网络设备配置的。I为控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。网络设备可以根据实际情况进行设置E和I的取值,例如,网络设备可以设置E的取值为2且I的取值为2,则在第一时域位置附近有2个用于发送控制信息的帧,一个帧为第一时域位置,另一个帧为距离第一时域位置2个帧之后的帧,如图8A所示。需要说明的是,Offset_UE的值可以为0。Where E is the number of frames used to send control information in the vicinity of the first time domain location. If the first time domain location is determined by the network device according to the frame in which the SSB is located, then E is used near the frame where the SSB is located. The number of frames in which control information is sent. E, G, and I can be pre-defined or network device configured. I is the interval of the monitoring timing of the search space for the control information. The network device can set the values of E and I according to the actual situation. For example, if the network device can set the value of E to 2 and the value of I to 2, there are 2 for sending control in the vicinity of the first time domain location. The frame of information, one frame is the first time domain position, and the other frame is the frame after 2 frames from the first time domain position, as shown in FIG. 8A. It should be noted that the value of Offset_UE may be 0.
当确定偏移量后,则根据第一时域位置和偏移量Offset_UE,终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的时域位置为第一时域位置加上偏移量Offset_UE的时域位置。终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的帧的帧号为SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN,或者,SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset_UE)mod T,或者,(SFN-Offset_UE)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N),或者,(SFN+Offset_UE)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)。After determining the offset, the terminal device determines that the time domain location where the paging DCI is located is the first time domain location plus the time domain location of the offset Offset_UE according to the first time domain location and the offset Offset_UE. The terminal device determines that the frame number of the frame in which the paging DCI is located is SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN, or SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset_UE) mod T, or, (SFN -Offset_UE) mod T = (T / N) × (UE_ID mod N), or (SFN + Offset_UE) mod T = (T / N) × (UE_ID mod N).
如图8B所示,以T=32,nB=T/8,G=1,E=2为例,根据公式(1)计算SFN_1,得到网络设备向UE_ID为1,5,9,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN_1为SFN 8,网络设备向UE_ID为2,6,10,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN_1为SFN 16,以此类推。As shown in FIG. 8B, taking T=32, nB=T/8, G=1, and E=2 as an example, SFN_1 is calculated according to formula (1), and the terminal of the network device to UE_ID is 1, 5, 9, ... is obtained. When the device sends the Paging DCI, SFN_1 is SFN 8. When the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, ..., SFN_1 is SFN 16, and so on.
根据Offset_UE=2*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)mod E)得到,网络设备向UE_ID为0,8,16…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 0,32,…,网络设备向UE_ID为4,12,20…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 2,34,…,网络设备向UE_ID为1,9, 17,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 8,40,…,网络设备向UE_ID为5,13,21,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 10,42,…,网络设备向UE_ID为2,10,18…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 16,48,…,网络设备向UE_ID为6,14,22…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN为SFN 18,50,…,以此类推。由图8B中的第二条时间轴上的发送Paging DCI所在的帧可知,根据公式SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN确定了更多网络设备可以发送Paging DCI的帧,当NR系统中终端设备的数量较多,而网络设备的寻呼容量有限时,则可以通过设置多个用于发送Paging DCI的帧,从而减少每个帧中寻呼的终端设备的数量,可以降低网络设备的运算复杂度。According to Offset_UE=2*(floor(UE_ID/N/G) mod E), when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 0, 8, 16, ..., the SFN is SFN 0, 32, ..., the network device When the terminal device with the UE_ID of 4, 12, 20... transmits the Paging DCI, the SFN is SFN 2, 34, ..., and when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 1, 9, 17, ..., the SFN is SFN 8, 40, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 5, 13, 21, ..., the SFN is SFN 10, 42, ..., and the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 10, 18... When the SFN is SFN 16, 48, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 6, 14, 22..., the SFN is SFN 18, 50, ..., and so on. It can be seen from the frame in which the Paging DCI is transmitted on the second time axis in FIG. 8B, according to the formula SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN, it is determined that more network devices can transmit the Paging DCI frame, and the terminal device in the NR system. When the paging capacity of the network device is limited, the number of terminals for paging in each frame can be reduced by setting multiple frames for transmitting the paging DCI, which can reduce the computational complexity of the network device. degree.
(4)根据SSB的索引确定偏移量。(4) Determine the offset based on the index of the SSB.
在本申请实施例中,将SSB的索引标记为SSBIndex,将根据SSB的索引确定的偏移量标记为Offset_SSBIndex。In the embodiment of the present application, the index of the SSB is marked as SSBIndex, and the offset determined according to the index of the SSB is marked as Offset_SSBIndex.
首先,介绍NR系统中SSB的索引与网络设备用于发送Paging DCI的帧的关联性。First, the association between the index of the SSB in the NR system and the frame used by the network device to transmit the Paging DCI is introduced.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备用于发送Paging DCI的帧可以与SSB的索引相关联,也可以不与SSB的索引相关联,在网络设备用于发送Paging DCI的帧与SSB的索引相关联的情况下,SSB的索引与网络设备用于发送Paging DCI的帧的关联,与,SSB的索引与网络设备用于发送剩余最小系统信息(residual minimum system information,RMSI)DCI的帧的关联相同。其中,SSB和RMSI控制资源集(control resource set,CORESET)复用有三种图样(pattern),如图9所示,在图9中的第一种复用关系,即pattern 1中,RMSI DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的周期为20ms;在pattern 2/3中,RMSI DCI的搜索空间的监测时机的周期与SSB的周期相同。In the embodiment of the present application, the frame used by the network device to send the paging DCI may be associated with the index of the SSB, or may not be associated with the index of the SSB, and the frame used by the network device to send the paging DCI is associated with the index of the SSB. In this case, the index of the SSB is associated with the frame used by the network device to send the Paging DCI, and the index of the SSB is the same as the association of the frame used by the network device to transmit the remaining minimum system information (RMSI) DCI. Among them, SSB and RMSI control resource set (CORESET) are multiplexed with three patterns, as shown in Figure 9, in the first multiplexing relationship in Figure 9, ie, pattern 1, RMSI DCI The monitoring time of the search space is 20 ms; in pattern 2/3, the monitoring time of the search space of the RMSI DCI is the same as the period of the SSB.
在SSB和RMSI CORESET复用pattern为pattern1的情况下,RMSI DCI的搜索空间的监测时机与SSB的索引相关联,具体来讲,终端设备可以在连续两个时隙(slot)上监测RMSI DCI,该两个slot的起始slot索引为n 0,对于SSB的索引为i的SSB,终端设备确定在一个无线帧SFN C中的n 0计算方法满足如下表达式: In the case where the SSB and RMSI CORESET multiplexing pattern is pattern1, the monitoring timing of the search space of the RMSI DCI is associated with the index of the SSB. Specifically, the terminal device can monitor the RMSI DCI in two consecutive slots. The starting slot index of the two slots is n 0 . For the SSB whose index of the SSB is i, the terminal device determines that the n 0 calculation method in one radio frame SFN C satisfies the following expression:
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000006
其中,无线帧SFN C满足如下表达式: Wherein, the radio frame SFN C satisfies the following expression:
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000007
时,SFN Cmod2=0;   (8)
when
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000007
When SFN C mod2=0; (8)
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000008
时,SFN Cmod2=1。   (9)
when
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000008
When SFN C mod2=1. (9)
其中,M和O为网络设备配置的,μ∈{0,1,2,3}是承载RMSI DCI的物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)使用的子载波间隔,
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000009
表示一个帧中的slot数量,其值在标准协议中定义。由此可以看出,网络设备发送Paging DCI所在的帧与SSB的索引相关。
Wherein, M and O are configured for the network device, and μ∈{0, 1, 2, 3} is a subcarrier spacing used by a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) carrying the RMSI DCI,
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000009
Represents the number of slots in a frame whose value is defined in the standard protocol. It can be seen that the frame in which the network device sends the paging DCI is related to the index of the SSB.
因此,在本申请实施例中,根据SSB的索引确定偏移量的计算方法满足如下表达式中的其中一种,其中,以SSB的索引为SSBIndex,根据SSB的索引确定的偏移量为Offset_SSBIndex为例:Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the calculation method for determining the offset according to the index of the SSB satisfies one of the following expressions, wherein the index of the SSB is SSBIndex, and the offset determined according to the index of the SSB is Offset_SSBIndex. For example:
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-000013
其中,J为整数,可以为0,或正整数,或负整数。Where J is an integer and can be 0, or a positive integer, or a negative integer.
需要说明的是,Offset_SSBIndex可以为0,例如,当SSB和RMSI CORESET复用pattern为pattern2或pattern3的情况下,Offset_SSBIndex为0。It should be noted that Offset_SSBIndex may be 0. For example, when the SSB and RMSI CORESET multiplexing pattern is pattern2 or pattern3, Offset_SSBIndex is 0.
当确定偏移量后,则根据第一时域位置和偏移量Offset_SSBIndex,终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的时域位置为第一时域位置加上偏移量Offset_SSBIndex的时域位置。终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的帧的帧号为SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SSBIndex)mod Num_SFN,或者,SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset_SSBIndex)mod T,或者,(SFN-Offset_SSBIndex)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N),或者,After determining the offset, the terminal device determines that the time domain location where the paging DCI is located is the first time domain location plus the time domain location of the offset Offset_SSBIndex according to the first time domain location and the offset Offset_SSBIndex. The terminal device determines that the frame number of the frame in which the paging DCI is located is SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SSBIndex) mod Num_SFN, or SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset_SSBIndex) mod T, or, (SFN -Offset_SSBIndex)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N), or,
(SFN+Offset_SSBIndex)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)。(SFN+Offset_SSBIndex) mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N).
(5)根据SSB所在的帧、SMTC所在的帧、SSB的索引以及终端设备的UE_ID中的至少两种参数确定偏移量。(5) The offset is determined according to at least two parameters of the frame in which the SSB is located, the frame in which the SMTC is located, the index of the SSB, and the UE_ID of the terminal device.
该偏移量的表达式可以如下多种中的其中一种:The expression for this offset can be one of the following:
1)Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE;1) Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE;
2)Offset_SMTC+Offset_SSBIndex;2) Offset_SMTC+Offset_SSBIndex;
3)Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex;3) Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex;
4)Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex;4) Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex;
其中,Offset_SMTC、Offset_UE以及Offset_SSBIndex的含义及计算方法与步骤303中的(1)-(4)中相应的内容相同,在此不再赘述。The meanings and calculation methods of Offset_SMTC, Offset_UE, and Offset_SSBIndex are the same as those in (1)-(4) in step 303, and are not described herein again.
将根据SSB所在的帧、SMTC所在的帧、SSB的索引以及终端设备的UE_ID中的至少两种参数确定的偏移量记为Offset,则根据第一时域位置和偏移量Offset,终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的时域位置为第一时域位置加上偏移量Offset的时域位置。终端设备确定Paging DCI所在的帧的帧号为SFN=(SFN_1+Offset)mod Num_SFN,或者,SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset)mod T,或者,(SFN-Offset)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N),或者,(SFN+Offset)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)。The offset determined according to at least two parameters of the frame where the SSB is located, the frame where the SMTC is located, the index of the SSB, and the UE_ID of the terminal device is recorded as Offset, and the terminal device is based on the first time domain position and the offset Offset. Determine the time domain location where the paging DCI is located as the time domain location of the first time domain location plus the offset Offset. The terminal device determines that the frame number of the frame in which the paging DCI is located is SFN=(SFN_1+Offset) mod Num_SFN, or SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset) mod T, or, (SFN -Offset) mod T = (T / N) × (UE_ID mod N), or, (SFN + Offset) mod T = (T / N) × (UE_ID mod N).
以SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN,SMTC的周期为8,T=32帧,nB=T/8,SFN_SMTC=4,I=2,G=1,E=2为例,根据公式(1)计算SFN_1,得到网络设备向UE_ID为0,4,8,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN_1为SFN0,32,…,网络设备向UE_ID为1,5,9,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN_1为SFN8,40,…,网络设备向UE_ID为2,6,10,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN_1为SFN 16,48,…,以此类推。由图10中的第二条时间轴上的发送Paging DCI所在的帧可知,通过公式(1)计算SFN_1与SMTC所在的帧距离较远。SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN, the period of SMTC is 8, T=32 frames, nB=T/8, SFN_SMTC=4, I=2, G=1, E=2, for example, according to the formula (1) Calculate SFN_1, and obtain the terminal device that the network device sends Paging DCI to the terminal device with UE_ID 0, 4, 8, ..., SFN_1 is SFN0, 32, ..., and the network device sends the UE_ID to 1, 5, 9, ... When the Paging DCI is sent, SFN_1 is SFN8, 40, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, ..., SFN_1 is SFN 16, 48, ..., and so on. It can be seen from the frame in which the Paging DCI is transmitted on the second time axis in FIG. 10 that the distance between the SFN_1 and the frame where the SMTC is located is calculated by the formula (1).
根据Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L得出Offset_SMTC=4,从而得到,网络设备向UE_ID为0,4,8,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC)mod Num_SFN为SFN 4,36,…,网络设备向UE_ID为1,5,9,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC)mod Num_SFN为SFN 12,44,…,网络设备向UE_ID为2,6,10,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC)mod Num_SFN为SFN 20,52,…,以此类推。由图10中的第三条时间轴上的发送Paging DCI所在的帧可知,通过SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC)mod Num_SFN的方法计算的帧与 SMTC所在的帧重合。According to Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L, Offset_SMTC=4 is obtained, so that when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_IDs of 0, 4, 8, ..., SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC) mod Num_SFN is SFN 4, 36, ..., when the network device sends a Paging DCI to a terminal device with UE_IDs of 1, 5, 9, ..., SFN = (SFN_1 + Offset_SMTC) mod Num_SFN is SFN 12, 44, ..., and the network device has a UE_ID of 2, 6, 10, When the terminal device of ... transmits the Paging DCI, SFN = (SFN_1 + Offset_SMTC) mod Num_SFN is SFN 20, 52, ..., and so on. It can be seen from the frame in which the Paging DCI is transmitted on the third time axis in FIG. 10 that the frame calculated by the method of SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC) mod Num_SFN coincides with the frame in which the SMTC is located.
根据Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)modE)得到,网络设备向UE_ID为0,8,16…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN为SFN 4,36,…,网络设备向UE_ID为4,12,20…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN为SFN 6,38,…,网络设备向UE_ID为1,9,17,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN为SFN 12,44,…,网络设备向UE_ID为5,13,21,…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN为SFN 14,46,…,网络设备向UE_ID为2,10,18…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN为SFN 20,52,…,网络设备向UE_ID为6,14,22…的终端设备发送Paging DCI时,SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE)mod Num_SFN为SFN 22,54,…,以此类推。当NR系统中终端设备的数量较多,而网络设备的寻呼容量有限时,则可以通过设置多个用于发送Paging DCI的帧,从而减少每个帧中寻呼的终端设备的数量,可以降低网络设备的运算复杂度。According to Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G) modE), when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_IDs of 0, 8, 16, ..., SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN is SFN. 4, 36, ..., when the network device sends the Paging DCI to the terminal device with the UE_ID of 4, 12, 20..., SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN is SFN 6,38,..., the network device has a UE_ID of 1 When the terminal device of 9, 17, ... transmits the Paging DCI, SFN = (SFN_LTE + Offset_SMTC + Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN is SFN 12, 44, ..., and the network device sends Paging to the terminal device with UE_ID of 5, 13, 21, ... In DCI, SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN is SFN 14,46,..., when the network device transmits Paging DCI to the terminal device with UE_IDs of 2, 10, 18..., SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE) When mod Num_SFN is SFN 20, 52, ..., when the network device sends a Paging DCI to a terminal device with UE_IDs 6, 14, 22..., SFN=(SFN_LTE+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE) mod Num_SFN is SFN 22, 54, ... analogy. When the number of terminal devices in the NR system is large, and the paging capacity of the network device is limited, a plurality of frames for transmitting the paging DCI may be set, thereby reducing the number of paging devices in each frame. Reduce the computational complexity of network devices.
(6)在确定第一时域位置SFN_1以及根据前述(1)-(5)中的任意一种方式确定偏移量后,确定用于发送控制信息的帧的帧号SFN还可以为满足如下表达式中的其中一种:(6) After determining the first time domain position SFN_1 and determining the offset according to any one of the above (1) to (5), determining the frame number SFN of the frame for transmitting the control information may further satisfy the following One of the expressions:
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC);SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC);
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_UE);SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_UE);
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SSBIndex);SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SSBIndex);
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE);SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE);
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_SSBIndex);SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_SSBIndex);
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex);SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex);
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex);SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex);
SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex)。SFN=(SFN_1+Offset_SMTC+Offset_UE+Offset_SSBIndex).
步骤304、终端设备确定控制信息所在的时隙。Step 304: The terminal device determines a time slot in which the control information is located.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备根据终端设备的标识和/或SSB的索引,确定控制信息在该控制信息所在的帧中的时隙。在下面的介绍中,以终端设备的标识为终端设备的UE_ID,控制信息为Paging DCI为例。In this embodiment of the present application, the network device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or the index of the SSB, the time slot in which the control information is in the frame in which the control information is located. In the following description, the identification of the terminal device is the UE_ID of the terminal device, and the control information is the Paging DCI as an example.
当一个帧中有大于一个用于发送控制信息的时隙,如图11所示,在一个帧中有两个用于发送Paging DCI的时隙,则可以根据终端设备的UE_ID确定用于发送Paging DCI的时隙,具体方式可以采用如下公式:i_s=floor(UE_ID/N/F)mod Ns,N=min(T,nB),Ns=max(1,nB/T),Ns表示一个帧中用于发送控制信息的时隙的个数。F为正整数,F可以是预先定义的,也可以是网络设备配置的。可选的,在确定用于发送控制信息的帧中,若采用Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N)mod E)时,F可以等于E。可选的,在确定用于发送控制信息的帧中,没有采用Offset_UE,则F可以等于1。i_s则表示对应的时隙的编号或者索引,例如,i_s=0指示用于发送控制信息的帧中第1个用于发送Paging DCI的时隙,i_s=1指示PF中第2个用于发送Paging DCI的时隙,i_s=Ns-1指 示用于发送控制信息的帧中第Ns个用于发送Paging DCI的时隙。When there is more than one time slot for transmitting control information in one frame, as shown in FIG. 11, there are two time slots for transmitting the paging DCI in one frame, and then it is determined according to the UE_ID of the terminal device for sending Paging. For the time slot of the DCI, the following formula can be used: i_s=floor(UE_ID/N/F) mod Ns, N=min(T, nB), Ns=max(1, nB/T), and Ns represents a frame. The number of time slots used to send control information. F is a positive integer, F can be predefined, or it can be configured by a network device. Optionally, in determining a frame for transmitting control information, if Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N) mod E) is used, F may be equal to E. Optionally, in the frame for determining to send the control information, if Offset_UE is not used, F may be equal to 1. I_s indicates the number or index of the corresponding slot. For example, i_s=0 indicates the first slot used to transmit the paging DCI in the frame for transmitting control information, and i_s=1 indicates the second one in the PF for transmission. The time slot of the Paging DCI, i_s = Ns-1, indicates the Nsth slot in the frame for transmitting control information for transmitting the paging DCI.
需要说明的是,一个帧中用于发送Paging DCI的时隙的个数可以由网络设备配置,也可以是与终端设备预先约定的,在此不作限制。It should be noted that the number of timeslots used to send the Paging DCI in a frame may be configured by the network device, or may be pre-agreed with the terminal device, and is not limited herein.
终端设备根据终端设备的SSB的索引,确定控制信息在该控制信息所在的帧中的时隙的实现方式可以包含但不限于如下多种方式:The implementation manner of determining, by the terminal device, the time slot of the control information in the frame in which the control information is located may include, but is not limited to, the following multiple manners:
第一种方式:The first way:
根据在步骤303中的(4)介绍的网络设备用于发送Paging DCI的帧与SSB的索引的关联性,则终端设备可以采用公式(7)确定网络设备用于发送Paging DCI的时隙,公式(7)在步骤303中的(4)中已进行了说明,在此不再赘述。According to the association between the frame used by the network device for transmitting the paging DCI and the index of the SSB, the terminal device may determine the time slot used by the network device to send the paging DCI by using formula (7). (7) has been described in (4) in step 303, and will not be described again.
需要说明的是,在用于发送Paging DCI的帧中,网络设备可以在一个时隙中发送Paging DCI,也可以在两个或多个连续的时隙中的一个时隙中发送Paging DCI,若网络设备在一个时隙中发送,则终端设备根据公式(7)确定的索引为该时隙的索引,若网络设备在两个或多个连续的时隙中的一个时隙中发送,则终端设备根据公式(7)确定的索引为该两个或多个连续的时隙的起始时隙的索引。当SSB和RMSI CORESET复用pattern为pattern1的情况下,可以采用第一种方式确定。It should be noted that, in the frame used for sending the Paging DCI, the network device may send the Paging DCI in one time slot, or may send the Paging DCI in one of two or more consecutive time slots. The network device is sent in one time slot, and the index determined by the terminal device according to formula (7) is an index of the time slot. If the network device sends in one of two or more consecutive time slots, the terminal The index determined by the device according to equation (7) is the index of the starting time slot of the two or more consecutive time slots. When the SSB and RMSI CORESET multiplexing pattern is pattern1, it can be determined in the first way.
需要说明的是,在用于发送Paging DCI的帧中,终端设备可以在一个时隙中监测Paging DCI,也可以在两个或多个连续的时隙中监测Paging DCI,若终端设备在一个时隙中监测,则根据公式(7)确定的索引为该时隙的索引,若终端设备在两个或多个连续的时隙中监测,则根据公式(7)确定的索引为该两个或多个连续的时隙的起始时隙的索引。当SSB和RMSI CORESET中的资源的复用pattern为pattern1的情况下,可以采用第一种方式确定。It should be noted that, in the frame for transmitting the paging DCI, the terminal device may monitor the paging DCI in one time slot, and may also monitor the paging DCI in two or more consecutive time slots, if the terminal device is at one time In the gap monitoring, the index determined according to formula (7) is the index of the time slot. If the terminal device monitors in two or more consecutive time slots, the index determined according to formula (7) is the two or An index of the starting time slot of a plurality of consecutive time slots. When the multiplexing pattern of the resources in the SSB and the RMSI CORESET is pattern1, it can be determined in the first manner.
第二种方式:The second way:
终端设备根据索引为i的SSB在其所在的帧中的时隙编号来确定Paging DCI的时隙。具体来讲,终端设备确定在一个用于发送Paging DCI的帧内,Paging DCI的时隙索引n 0为索引为i的SSB在其所在的帧中的时隙编号与K的和,其中,K为整数,K可以为0,可以为正整数,可以为负整数。当SSB和RMSI CORESET复用pattern为pattern2或pattern3的情况下,可以采用第二种方式确定。 The terminal device determines the time slot of the paging DCI according to the slot number of the SSB indexed i in the frame in which it is located. Specifically, the terminal device determines that in a frame for transmitting the paging DCI, the slot index n 0 of the paging DCI is the sum of the slot number and K in the frame in which the SSB indexed i is located, where K For an integer, K can be 0, can be a positive integer, and can be a negative integer. When the SSB and RMSI CORESET multiplexing pattern is pattern2 or pattern3, it can be determined in the second way.
终端设备根据索引为i的SSB在其所在的帧中的时隙编号以及终端设备的UE_ID来确定Paging DCI的时隙。具体来讲,当网络设备用于发送Paging DCI的帧与SSB的索引相关联,且一个帧中有大于一个用于发送Paging DCI的时隙时,以SMTC的周期为0.5帧,网络设备配置nB=2T为例,在这种情况下,1个PF中有2个用于发送Paging DCI的时隙,即,Ns=2,则终端设备根据i_s=floor(UE_ID/N/F)mod Ns确定i_s=0时,表示在PF内向终端设备Paging DCI的时隙索引n 0为在该PF内第1个index为i的SSB在其所在的帧中的时隙编号,当终端设备确定i_s=1时,表示在PF内向终端设备Paging DCI的时隙索引n 0为在该PF内第2个index为i的SSB在其所在的帧中的时隙编号。 The terminal device determines the time slot of the paging DCI according to the slot number of the SSB whose index is i in the frame in which it is located and the UE_ID of the terminal device. Specifically, when the frame used by the network device to send the paging DCI is associated with the index of the SSB, and there is more than one time slot for transmitting the paging DCI in one frame, the period of the SMTC is 0.5 frames, and the network device configures nB. =2T is taken as an example. In this case, two of the PFs are used to transmit the time slot of the paging DCI, that is, Ns=2, and the terminal device determines according to i_s=floor(UE_ID/N/F) mod Ns. When i_s=0, the slot index n 0 indicating that the DCI is pinged to the terminal device in the PF is the slot number of the SSB in which the first index is i in the PF, and the terminal device determines i_s=1. In the case of the PF, the slot index n 0 of the paging device DCI in the PF is the slot number of the SSB in which the second index is i in the PF.
步骤305、网络设备确定控制信息所在的时域位置。Step 305: The network device determines a time domain location where the control information is located.
步骤306、网络设备确定控制信息所在的时隙。Step 306: The network device determines a time slot in which the control information is located.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备确定控制信息的时域位置为网络设备所有的能够用 来向终端设备发送控制信息的时域位置,因此,网络设备确定控制信息的时域位置和时隙的方法与终端设备相同,即步骤305与步骤303相同,步骤306与步骤304相同,在此不再赘述。In this embodiment of the present application, the network device determines that the time domain location of the control information is a time domain location of the network device that can be used to send control information to the terminal device. Therefore, the network device determines the time domain location and time slot of the control information. The method is the same as that of the terminal device, that is, the step 305 is the same as the step 303, and the step 306 is the same as the step 304, and details are not described herein again.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中不对步骤303-步骤306的执行顺序进行限制,即可以先执行步骤305-步骤306,然后再执行步骤303-步骤304,或者同时执行步骤303-步骤306,或者先执行步骤304,然后执行步骤303,再执行步骤306,最后执行步骤305,或者先执行步骤305,然后执行步骤303,再执行步骤304,最后执行步骤306等,在此不一一列举。在图3中以顺序执行步骤303-步骤306为例。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the execution sequence of step 303-step 306 is not limited, that is, step 305-step 306 may be performed first, then step 303-step 304 may be performed, or step 303-step 306 may be performed simultaneously. Or step 304 is performed first, then step 303 is executed, step 306 is performed again, step 305 is performed last, or step 305 is performed first, then step 303 is performed, step 304 is performed, and step 306 is finally executed. . Steps 303 to 306 are sequentially performed in FIG. 3 as an example.
步骤307、终端设备监测控制信息。Step 307: The terminal device monitors the control information.
当终端设备确定用于监测控制信息的时域位置和时隙后,则按照终端设备监测控制信息的周期T,在确定的控制信息所在的时域位置上监测控制信息,或者,在确定的控制信息所在的时域位置及时隙中监测控制信息。After the terminal device determines the time domain location and the time slot for monitoring the control information, the control information is monitored at the time domain location where the determined control information is located according to the period T of the terminal device monitoring control information, or, in the determined control The time domain location where the information is located and the monitoring control information in the time slot.
步骤308、网络设备发送控制信息,终端设备接收该控制信息。Step 308: The network device sends control information, and the terminal device receives the control information.
以控制信息为Paging DCI为例,当网络设备确定用于发送控制信息的时域位置后,则根据实际需求,在该时域位置内发送控制信息。例如,当网络设备需要向处于空闲态的终端设备发送数据,或者系统信息发生改变时,网络设备则在该时域位置上发送Paging DCI。具体来讲,网络设备可以确定可用于向终端设备发送控制信息的一个或多个时域位置,网络设备可以选择其中一个时域位置向终端设备发送控制信息。Taking the control information as the Paging DCI as an example, when the network device determines the time domain location for transmitting the control information, the control information is sent in the time domain location according to actual needs. For example, when the network device needs to send data to the terminal device in the idle state, or the system information changes, the network device sends the Paging DCI at the time domain location. Specifically, the network device can determine one or more time domain locations that can be used to send control information to the terminal device, and the network device can select one of the time domain locations to send control information to the terminal device.
需要说明的是,由于网络设备可能不会一直发送控制信息,而为了保证在网络设备发送的控制信息后,终端设备能接收该控制信息,则终端设备会按照终端设备监测控制信息的周期T一直监测,因此,终端设备监测控制信息的周期与终端设备接收控制信息的周期可以不同,当然,若网络设备在终端设备的每个监测控制信息的周期T都发送控制信息,则终端设备监测控制信息的周期与终端设备接收控制信息的周期相同。It should be noted that, because the network device may not always send control information, and in order to ensure that the terminal device can receive the control information after the control information sent by the network device, the terminal device monitors the period T of the control information according to the terminal device. Monitoring, therefore, the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information may be different from the period in which the terminal device receives the control information. Of course, if the network device sends the control information in the period T of each monitoring control information of the terminal device, the terminal device monitors the control information. The period is the same as the period in which the terminal device receives the control information.
在上述技术方案中,网络设备或终端设备根据同步信号块或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置确定用于发送或接收控制信息的时域位置,实现了在没有CRS的情况下,接收控制信息,且,采用这种方式确定的用于发送或接收控制信息的时域位置,与同步信号块或同步信号块测量时间的时域位置相接近或相同,从而终端设备在接收该控制信息之前,可以先根据同步信号块进行下行同步,完成下行同步后,在该时域位置上接收该控制信息,可以保证提高同步的有效性。In the above technical solution, the network device or the terminal device determines the time domain location for transmitting or receiving the control information according to the time domain position where the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and realizes the reception control without the CRS. Information, and the time domain position for transmitting or receiving the control information determined in this manner is close to or the same as the time domain position of the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time, so that the terminal device receives the control information before receiving the control information The downlink synchronization may be performed according to the synchronization signal block. After the downlink synchronization is completed, the control information is received at the time domain location, which can ensure the effectiveness of the synchronization.
进一步,由于终端设备接收该控制信息的时域位置与同步信号块或同步信号块测量时间的时域位置相接近或相同,这样,终端设备可以一次醒来的过程中,完成根据同步信号块进行小区测量以及接收该控制信息,可以节省终端设备的功耗。Further, since the time domain position of the terminal device receiving the control information is close to or the same as the time domain position of the synchronization signal block or the synchronization signal block measurement time, the terminal device can complete the process according to the synchronization signal block during the wake-up process. The cell measurement and receiving the control information can save power consumption of the terminal device.
上述本申请提供的实施例中,分别从网络设备、终端设备、以及网络设备和终端设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能,网络设备和终端设备可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块,以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。In the embodiment provided by the present application, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced from the perspective of interaction between the network device, the terminal device, and the network device and the terminal device. In order to implement the functions in the foregoing method provided by the embodiments of the present application, the network device and the terminal device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module, and implement the foregoing functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. . One of the above functions is performed in a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module, depending on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution.
图12示出了一种通信装置1200的结构示意图。其中,通信装置1200可以是终端设备,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能;通信装置1200也可以是能够支持终端设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能的装置。通信装置1200可以是硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块。通信装置1200可以由芯片系统实现。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1200. The communication device 1200 can be a terminal device, and can implement the function of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1200 can also be a device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. . The communication device 1200 can be a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. Communication device 1200 can be implemented by a chip system. In the embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, and may also include a chip and other discrete devices.
通信装置1200可以包括处理模块1201和通信模块1202。The communication device 1200 can include a processing module 1201 and a communication module 1202.
处理模块1201可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中的步骤303、步骤304以及步骤307,或用于执行图3所示的实施例中的步骤304以及步骤307,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。通信模块1202用于通信装置1200和其它模块进行通信,其可以是电路、器件、接口、总线、软件模块、收发器或者其它任意可以实现通信的装置。The processing module 1201 may be configured to perform step 303, step 304, and step 307 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, or to perform step 304 and step 307 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and/or to support Other processes of the techniques described herein. Communication module 1202 is for communication device 1200 to communicate with other modules, which may be circuits, devices, interfaces, buses, software modules, transceivers, or any other device that can implement communication.
通信模块1202可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中的步骤302和步骤308,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。 Communication module 1202 can be used to perform steps 302 and 308 in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 3, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。All the related content of the steps involved in the foregoing method embodiments may be referred to the functional descriptions of the corresponding functional modules, and details are not described herein again.
图13示出了一种通信装置1300的结构示意图。其中,通信装置1300可以是网络设备,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备的功能;通信装置1300也可以是能够支持终端设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备的功能的装置。通信装置1300可以是硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块。通信装置1300可以由芯片系统实现。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1300. The communication device 1300 can be a network device, and can implement the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1300 can also be a device that can support the terminal device to implement the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. . The communication device 1300 can be a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. Communication device 1300 can be implemented by a chip system. In the embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, and may also include a chip and other discrete devices.
通信装置1300可以包括处理模块1301和通信模块1302。The communication device 1300 can include a processing module 1301 and a communication module 1302.
处理模块1301可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中的步骤305以及步骤306,或,用于执行图3所示的实施例中的步骤306,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。通信模块1301用于通信装置1300和其它模块进行通信,其可以是电路、器件、接口、总线、软件模块、收发器或者其它任意可以实现通信的装置。The processing module 1301 can be used to perform steps 305 and 306 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, or to perform step 306 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and/or to support the techniques described herein. Other processes. The communication module 1301 is used by the communication device 1300 to communicate with other modules, which may be circuits, devices, interfaces, buses, software modules, transceivers, or any other device that can implement communication.
通信模块1302可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中的步骤301和步骤308,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。 Communication module 1302 can be used to perform steps 301 and 308 in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 3, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。All the related content of the steps involved in the foregoing method embodiments may be referred to the functional descriptions of the corresponding functional modules, and details are not described herein again.
本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理器中,也可以是单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。The division of the modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. In addition, each functional module in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing. In the device, it can also be physically existed alone, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules.
如图14所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1400,其中,通信装置1400可以是图3所示的实施例中的终端设备,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能;通信装置1400也可以是能够支持终端设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能的装置。其中,该通信装置1400可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系 统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。As shown in FIG. 14 , the communication device 1400 is provided in the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1400 can be the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , and can implement the function of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application; The communication device 1400 may also be a device that can support the terminal device to implement the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1400 can be a chip system. In the embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, and may also include a chip and other discrete devices.
通信装置1400包括至少一个处理器1420,用于实现或用于支持通信装置1400实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能。示例性地,处理器1420可以确定控制信息所在的时域位置和/或控制信息所在的时隙,具体参见方法示例中的详细描述,此处不做赘述。The communication device 1400 includes at least one processor 1420 for implementing or for supporting the communication device 1400 to implement the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. Illustratively, the processor 1420 may determine the time domain location where the control information is located and/or the time slot in which the control information is located. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, and no further details are provided herein.
通信装置1400还可以包括至少一个存储器1430,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1430和处理器1420耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1420可能和存储器1430协同操作。处理器1420可能执行存储器1430中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。Communication device 1400 can also include at least one memory 1430 for storing program instructions and/or data. Memory 1430 is coupled to processor 1420. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form for information interaction between devices, units or modules. Processor 1420 may operate in conjunction with memory 1430. Processor 1420 may execute program instructions stored in memory 1430. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in a processor.
通信装置1400还可以包括通信接口1410,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于通信装置1400中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备可以是网络设备。处理器1420可以利用通信接口1410收发数据。The communication device 1400 can also include a communication interface 1410 for communicating with other devices through the transmission medium such that the devices for use in the communication device 1400 can communicate with other devices. Illustratively, the other device may be a network device. The processor 1420 can transmit and receive data using the communication interface 1410.
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口1410、处理器1420以及存储器1430之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图14中以存储器1430、处理器1420以及通信接口1410之间通过总线1440连接,总线在图14中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图14中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The specific connection medium between the communication interface 1410, the processor 1420, and the memory 1430 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. In the embodiment of the present application, the memory 1430, the processor 1420, and the communication interface 1410 are connected by a bus 1440 in FIG. 14. The bus is indicated by a thick line in FIG. 14, and the connection manner between other components is only schematically illustrated. , not limited to. The bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one thick line is shown in Figure 14, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
在本申请实施例中,处理器1420可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor 1420 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or a transistor logic device, and a discrete hardware component. Or the methods, steps, and logic blocks disclosed in the embodiments of the present application are executed. A general purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本申请实施例中,存储器1430可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiment of the present application, the memory 1430 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), or a volatile memory. For example, random access memory (RAM). A memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of an instruction or data structure and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function for storing program instructions and/or data.
如图15所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1500,其中,通信装置1500可以是网络设备,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备的功能;通信装置1500也可以是能够支持核心网网元实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备的功能的装置。其中,该通信装置1500可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。As shown in FIG. 15 , the communication device 1500 is provided in the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1500 can be a network device, and can implement the functions of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1500 can also support the core. The network element implements the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1500 can be a chip system. In the embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, and may also include a chip and other discrete devices.
通信装置1500包括至少一个处理器1520,用于实现或用于支持通信装置1500实现本申请实施例提供的方法中核心网网元的功能。示例性地,处理器1520可以确定控制信息所在的时域位置和/或控制信息所在的时隙,具体参见方法示例中的详细描述, 此处不做赘述。The communication device 1500 includes at least one processor 1520 for implementing or for supporting the communication device 1500 to implement the functions of the core network element in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. Illustratively, the processor 1520 may determine the time domain location where the control information is located and/or the time slot in which the control information is located. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, and no further details are provided herein.
通信装置1500还可以包括至少一个存储器1530,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1530和处理器1520耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1520可能和存储器1530协同操作。处理器1520可能执行存储器1530中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。Communication device 1500 can also include at least one memory 1530 for storing program instructions and/or data. Memory 1530 is coupled to processor 1520. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form for information interaction between devices, units or modules. Processor 1520 may operate in conjunction with memory 1530. Processor 1520 may execute program instructions stored in memory 1530. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in a processor.
通信装置1500还可以包括通信接口1510,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于装置1500中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备可以是终端设备。处理器1520可以利用通信接口1510收发数据。The communication device 1500 can also include a communication interface 1510 for communicating with other devices over a transmission medium such that devices for use in the device 1500 can communicate with other devices. Illustratively, the other device may be a terminal device. The processor 1520 can transmit and receive data using the communication interface 1510.
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口1510、处理器1520以及存储器1530之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图15中以存储器1530、处理器1520以及通信接口1510之间通过总线1540连接,总线在图15中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图15中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The specific connection medium between the communication interface 1510, the processor 1520, and the memory 1530 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. In the embodiment of the present application, the memory 1530, the processor 1520, and the communication interface 1510 are connected by a bus 1540 in FIG. 15, and the bus is indicated by a thick line in FIG. 15, and the connection manner between other components is only schematically illustrated. , not limited to. The bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one thick line is shown in Figure 15, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
在本申请实施例中,处理器1520可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor 1520 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or a transistor logic device, and a discrete hardware component. Or the methods, steps, and logic blocks disclosed in the embodiments of the present application are executed. A general purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本申请实施例中,存储器1530可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiment of the present application, the memory 1530 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), or a volatile memory. For example, random access memory (RAM). A memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of an instruction or data structure and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function for storing program instructions and/or data.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行图3中任意一个实施例中终端设备执行的方法。A computer readable storage medium, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method performed by the terminal device in any of the embodiments of FIG.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行图3中任意一个实施例中网络设备执行的方法。A computer readable storage medium, including instructions, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method performed by the network device in any of the embodiments of FIG.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行图3中任意一个实施例中所述终端设备执行的方法。Also provided in the embodiment of the present application is a computer program product, comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method performed by the terminal device in any one of the embodiments of FIG.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行图3中任意一个实施例中所述网络设备执行的方法。Also provided in the embodiment of the present application is a computer program product, comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method performed by the network device in any one of the embodiments of FIG.
本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现前述方法中终端设备的功能。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。The embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器, 用于实现前述方法中网络设备的功能。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。The embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which includes a processor, and may further include a memory for implementing the functions of the network device in the foregoing method. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
本申请实施例提供了一种系统,所述系统包括前述所述的终端设备和所述网络设备。The embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes the foregoing terminal device and the network device.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,简称DSL)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机可以存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,简称DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,SSD)等。The method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user device, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media. The available media can be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, Magnetic tape), optical medium (for example, digital video disc (DVD)), or semiconductor medium (for example, SSD).
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and changes can be made in the present application without departing from the scope of the application. Thus, it is intended that the present invention cover the modifications and variations of the present invention.

Claims (72)

  1. 一种控制信息的接收方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for receiving control information, comprising:
    终端设备根据所述终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;Determining, by the terminal device, a time domain location where the control information is located according to the identifier and the first parameter of the terminal device, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
    所述终端设备在所述控制信息所在的时域位置监测或接收所述控制信息。The terminal device monitors or receives the control information at a time domain location where the control information is located.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 1 wherein
    所述第一参数包含所述同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或The first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, and an interval between a time domain location where the control information is located and a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device; or
    所述第一参数包含所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。The first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and an interval between a time domain location where the control information is located and a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located according to the terminal device The identity of the logo is determined.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,所述第一参数包含所述同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,或,所述第一参数包含所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first parameter further comprises an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information; wherein the first parameter The parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, or the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, The time domain position at which the first sync signal block is located is within the sync signal block measurement time.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为所述终端设备根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为根据第二参数确定的;The method according to claim 3, wherein the time domain location in which the control information is located is a time domain location after the first time domain location is increased by an offset, wherein the first time domain location is the The terminal device is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
    其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
    所述同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located;
    所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
    所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
    所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the first parameter further comprises a third parameter, and a maximum value of the third parameter is determined according to a first period or a fourth parameter, wherein the One period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of time at which the synchronization signal block measures time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of a search space of the control information.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。The method according to claim 5, wherein the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to the first period, or a maximum value of the third parameter The value is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  7. 根据权利要求1至6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the time domain location where the control information is located is a frame in which the control information is located, and the time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located is the synchronization The frame in which the signal block is located, the time domain position in which the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame in which the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧 的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, by the terminal device, a time slot in the frame in which the control information is located according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block; wherein the first parameter includes a synchronization signal block In the case of the frame in which the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, in the case where the first parameter includes the frame in which the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  9. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置、所述第一时域位置及所述偏移量满足如下表达式:The method according to claim 4, wherein the time domain location in which the control information is located, the first time domain location, and the offset amount satisfy the following expression:
    SFN=(SFN_1+Offset);或SFN=(SFN_1+Offset); or
    SFN=(SFN_1+Offset)mod Num_SFN;或SFN=(SFN_1+Offset)mod Num_SFN; or
    SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset)mod T;或SFN mod T=((T/N)×(UE_ID mod N)+Offset)mod T; or
    (SFN-Offset)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N);或(SFN-Offset) mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N); or
    (SFN+Offset)mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N);(SFN+Offset) mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N);
    其中,所述SFN表示所述控制信息所在的时域位置的系统帧号,所述mod函数表示取模运算,所述SFN_1表示所述第一时域位置,所述SFN_1满足如下表达式:SFN_1mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N),所述Num_SFN表示所述系统帧号的最大值或所述系统帧号的最大值与1的和,所述Offset表示所述偏移量,所述T表示所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期,所述UE_ID表示所述终端设备的标识,所述N=min(T,nB),所述参数nB用来网络设备的寻呼密度,其中,所述Offset为包含Offset_UE、Offset_SSB、Offset_SMTC以及Offset_SSBIndex中的一个或多个的和,所述Offset_UE表示根据所述终端设备的标识确定的偏移量,所述Offset_SSB表示根据SSB的时域位置确定的偏移量,所述Offset_SMTC表示根据SMTC的时域位置确定的偏移量,所述Offset_SSBIndex表示根据所述SSB的索引确定的偏移量。The SFN represents a system frame number of a time domain location where the control information is located, the mod function represents a modulo operation, the SFN_1 represents the first time domain location, and the SFN_1 satisfies the following expression: SFN_1mod T=(T/N)×(UE_ID mod N), the Num_SFN represents a maximum value of the system frame number or a sum of a maximum value of the system frame number and 1 , and the Offset represents the offset amount, The T indicates a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, the UE_ID indicates an identifier of the terminal device, the N=min (T, nB), and the parameter nB is used for a paging density of the network device. Wherein the Offset is a sum including one or more of Offset_UE, Offset_SSB, Offset_SMTC, and Offset_SSBIndex, the Offset_UE indicating an offset determined according to an identifier of the terminal device, and the Offset_SSB indicating a time domain according to the SSB A position-determined offset, the Offset_SMTC representing an offset determined according to a time domain position of the SMTC, the Offset_SSBIndex representing an offset determined according to an index of the SSB.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Offset_UE满足如下表达式:The method according to claim 9, wherein the Offset_UE satisfies the following expression:
    Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N)mod E);或Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N)mod E); or
    Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)mod E);Offset_UE=I*(floor(UE_ID/N/G)mod E);
    其中,所述Offset_UE表示所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔,所述floor()函数表示向下取整运算,所述mod函数表示取模运算,所述E表示在以所述第一参数为中心的时域位置范围内包含的用于发送所述控制信息的时域位置的个数,所述I表示所述E个时域位置中每两个时域位置之间的间隔,所述N=min(T,nB),所述参数nB用来所述网络设备的寻呼密度,所述G为正整数。The Offset_UE represents an interval between a time domain location where the control information is located and a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the floor() function represents a rounding operation, the mod function Representing a modulo operation, where E represents the number of time domain locations for transmitting the control information included in a time domain location range centered on the first parameter, and the I represents the E time The interval between every two time domain locations in the domain location, said N = min(T, nB), said parameter nB being used for the paging density of said network device, said G being a positive integer.
  11. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Offset_SSBIndex满足如下表达式:The method according to claim 9, wherein the Offset_SSBIndex satisfies the following expression:
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100001
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100001
    or
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100002
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100002
    or
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100003
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100003
    or
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100004
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100004
    其中,所述J为整数,所述i为同步信号块的索引,所述
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100005
    表示一个帧中的时隙的数量,所述M和所述O为所述网络设备配置的,所述μ∈{0,1,2,3}是承载剩余系统信息RMSI DCI的物理下行控制信道PDCCH使用的子载波间隔。
    Wherein, J is an integer, and the i is an index of a synchronization signal block,
    Figure PCTCN2019086323-appb-100005
    Representing the number of time slots in a frame, the M and the O being configured for the network device, the μ∈{0, 1, 2, 3} being a physical downlink control channel carrying remaining system information RMSI DCI The subcarrier spacing used by the PDCCH.
  12. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Offset_SMTC满足如下表达式:The method of claim 9, wherein the Offset_SMTC satisfies the following expression:
    Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B;或Offset_SMTC=ceil((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B; or
    Offset_SMTC=floor((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B;或Offset_SMTC=floor((SFN_SMTC+L)/B)*B; or
    Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L;Offset_SMTC=SFN_SMTC+L;
    其中,所述*表示相乘运算,所述SFN_SMTC为同步信号块检测时间SMTC所在的帧的帧号SFN的最小值,或,所述SFN_SMTC为从SFN 0开始第一个SMTC所在的帧的SFN,或,所述SFN_SMTC为从SFN 0开始第一个SMTC所在的帧距离SFN 0的偏移值,L为整数,或L=B+((SFN_SMTC+C)modA),A,B和C为整数,ceil()函数为向上取整的函数Wherein, the * indicates a multiplication operation, and the SFN_SMTC is a minimum value of a frame number SFN of a frame in which the synchronization signal block detection time SMTC is located, or the SFN_SMTC is an SFN of a frame in which the first SMTC is located from SFN 0 Or, the SFN_SMTC is an offset value of the frame distance SFN 0 where the first SMTC is located from SFN 0, L is an integer, or L=B+((SFN_SMTC+C) modA), and A, B, and C are integers. , ceil () function is a function that is rounded up
  13. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Offset_SSB满足如下表达式:The method of claim 9, wherein the Offset_SSB satisfies the following expression:
    Offset_SSB=ceil((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B;或Offset_SSB=ceil((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B; or
    Offset_SSB=floor((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B;或Offset_SSB=floor((SFN_SSB+L)/B)*B; or
    Offset_SSB=SFN_SSB+L;Offset_SSB=SFN_SSB+L;
    其中,所述SFN_SSB为同步信号块SSB所在的帧的帧号SFN的最小值,或,SFN_SSB为从SFN 0开始第一个SSB所在的帧的SFN,或,所述SFN_SSB为从SFN 0开始第一个SSB所在的帧距离SFN 0的偏移值,所述L为整数,或L=B+((SFN_SSB+C)modA),所述A,所述B和所述C为整数,所述ceil()函数为向上取整的函数。The SFN_SSB is the minimum value of the frame number SFN of the frame in which the synchronization signal block SSB is located, or SFN_SSB is the SFN of the frame in which the first SSB is located from SFN 0, or the SFN_SSB is started from SFN 0. An offset value of a frame distance SFB0 where the SSB is located, the L is an integer, or L=B+((SFN_SSB+C) modA), the A, the B and the C are integers, the ceil The () function is a rounded up function.
  14. 一种控制信息的接收方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for receiving control information, comprising:
    终端设备根据所述终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙,终端设备在所述时隙接收所述控制信息。The terminal device determines a time slot in which the control information is located according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, and the terminal device receives the control information in the time slot.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 14, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定所述控制信息所在的帧,然后在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。The terminal device determines a frame in which the control information is located according to an identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, and then receives the control information in the time slot in the frame.
  16. 一种控制信息的发送方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting control information, comprising:
    网络设备根据所述终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The network device determines, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
    所述网络设备在所述控制信息所在的时域位置内发送所述控制信息。The network device sends the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 16 wherein:
    所述第一参数包含所述同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或The first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, and an interval between a time domain location where the control information is located and a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device; or
    所述第一参数包含所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。The first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and an interval between a time domain location where the control information is located and a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located according to the terminal device The identity of the logo is determined.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,所述第一参数包含所述同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,或,所述 第一参数包含所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the first parameter further comprises an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information; wherein the first parameter The parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, or the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, The time domain position at which the first sync signal block is located is within the sync signal block measurement time.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为所述终端设备根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为根据第二参数确定的;The method according to claim 18, wherein the time domain location in which the control information is located is a time domain location after the first time domain location is increased by an offset, wherein the first time domain location is the The terminal device is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
    其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
    所述同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located;
    所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
    所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
    所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
  20. 根据权利要求16至18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the first parameter further comprises a third parameter, and a maximum value of the third parameter is determined according to a first period or a fourth parameter, wherein the One period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of time at which the synchronization signal block measures time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of a search space of the control information.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。The method according to claim 20, wherein the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to the first period, or a maximum value of the third parameter The value is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  22. 根据权利要求16至21任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 21, wherein the time domain location where the control information is located is a frame in which the control information is located, and the time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located is the synchronization The frame in which the signal block is located, the time domain position in which the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame in which the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 22, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, by the network device, a time slot in the frame in which the control information is located according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block; wherein the first parameter includes a synchronization signal block In the case of the frame in which the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, in the case where the first parameter includes the frame in which the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the time domain position in which the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  24. 一种控制信息的接收方法,网络设备根据终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙,网络设备在所述时隙发送所述控制信息。A method for receiving control information, the network device determines a time slot in which the control information is located according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, and the network device sends the control information in the time slot.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 24, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定所述控制信息所在的帧,在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。Determining, by the network device, a frame in which the control information is located according to an identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, and receiving the control information in the time slot in the frame.
  26. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和收发器,其中,所述处理器与所述收发器耦合,用于执行如权利要求1至25任一项所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processor and a transceiver, wherein the processor is coupled to the transceiver for performing the method of any one of claims 1 to 25.
  27. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理器,用于根据终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;a processor, configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
    存储器,用于存储程序指令;a memory for storing program instructions;
    通信接口,用于在所述处理器的控制下,在所述控制信息所在的时域位置内接收所述控制信息。And a communication interface, configured to receive the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located under control of the processor.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或,所述第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。The communication device according to claim 27, wherein said first parameter comprises a time domain location in which the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location in which said control information is located, and a time domain location in which said synchronization signal block is located The interval between the two is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the measurement time of the synchronization signal block are located The interval between time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
  29. 根据权利要求27或28所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,在所述第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。The communication device according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the first parameter further comprises an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information; wherein Where the first parameter includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, The time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为所述处理器根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为所述处理器根据第二参数确定的;The communication device according to claim 29, wherein the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain location after the first time domain location is increased by an offset, wherein the first time domain location is The processor is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined by the processor according to the second parameter;
    其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
    所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first synchronization signal block is located;
    所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
    所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
    所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
  31. 根据权利要求27至30任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。The communication device according to any one of claims 27 to 30, wherein the first parameter further comprises a third parameter, and a maximum value of the third parameter is determined according to a first period or a fourth parameter, The first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of the search space of the control information.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。The communication device according to claim 31, wherein a maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to the first period, or a third parameter The maximum value is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  33. 根据权利要求27至32任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。The communication device according to any one of claims 27 to 32, wherein the time domain location where the control information is located is the location of the frame in which the control information is located, and the time domain location in which the synchronization signal block is located is The position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理器还用于:The communication device of claim 33, wherein the processor is further configured to:
    根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, a time slot of the control information in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, where the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  35. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理器,用于根据终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙;a processor, configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
    通信接口,用于在所述时隙接收所述控制信息。And a communication interface, configured to receive the control information in the time slot.
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理器用于根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,通信接口用于在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。The communication device according to claim 35, wherein the processor is configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which control information is located, where a communication interface is used in the frame The time slot in the receiving the control information.
  37. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理器,用于根据终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;a processor, configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
    存储器,用于存储程序指令;a memory for storing program instructions;
    通信接口,用于在所述处理器的控制下,在所述控制信息所在的时域位置内向所述终端设备发送所述控制信息。And a communication interface, configured to send the control information to the terminal device in a time domain location where the control information is located under control of the processor.
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或,所述第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。The communication device according to claim 37, wherein said first parameter comprises a time domain location in which the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location in which said control information is located, and a time domain location in which said synchronization signal block is located The interval between the two is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the measurement time of the synchronization signal block are located The interval between time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
  39. 根据权利要求37或38所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数集合包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数集合包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。The communication device according to claim 37 or claim 38, wherein the first parameter further comprises an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information; wherein, at the first Where the parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter set includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, The time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为根据第二参数确定的;The communication device according to claim 39, wherein the time domain location in which the control information is located is a time domain location after the first time domain location is increased by an offset, wherein the first time domain location is based on Determining, by the identifier of the terminal device, the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
    其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
    所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first synchronization signal block is located;
    所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
    所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
    所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
  41. 根据权利要求37至40任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。The communication device according to any one of claims 37 to 40, wherein the first parameter further comprises a third parameter, and a maximum value of the third parameter is determined according to a first period or a fourth parameter, The first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of the search space of the control information.
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。The communication device according to claim 41, wherein a maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to the first period, or a third parameter The maximum value is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  43. 根据权利要求37至42任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。The communication device according to any one of claims 37 to 42, wherein the time domain location where the control information is located is the location of the frame in which the control information is located, and the time domain location in which the synchronization signal block is located is The position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理器还用于:The communication device of claim 43, wherein the processor is further configured to:
    根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, a time slot of the control information in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, where the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  45. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器,用于根据终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙;A communication device, comprising: a processor, configured to determine a time slot in which control information is located according to an identifier of a terminal device and/or an index of a synchronization signal block;
    通信接口,用于在所述时隙发送所述控制信息。And a communication interface, configured to send the control information in the time slot.
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理器用于根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,通信接口用于在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。The communication device according to claim 45, wherein the processor is configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which control information is located, where a communication interface is used in the frame The time slot in the receiving the control information.
  47. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理模块和收发模块,其中,所述处理模块与所述收发模块耦合,用于执行如权利要求1至25任一项所述的方法。A communication device, comprising a processing module and a transceiver module, wherein the processing module is coupled to the transceiver module for performing the method of any one of claims 1 to 25.
  48. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理模块,用于根据所述通信装置的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;a processing module, configured to determine a time domain location where the control information is located according to the identifier and the first parameter of the communication device, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located ;
    接收模块,用于在所述控制信息所在的时域位置内接收所述控制信息。And a receiving module, configured to receive the control information in a time domain location where the control information is located.
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或,所述第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。The communication device according to claim 48, wherein said first parameter comprises a time domain location in which the synchronization signal block is located, a time domain location in which said control information is located, and a time domain location in which said synchronization signal block is located The interval between the two is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the measurement time of the synchronization signal block are located The interval between time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
  50. 根据权利要求48或49所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。The communication device according to claim 48 or 49, wherein the first parameter further comprises an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information; wherein, in the first Where the parameter includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, the The time domain position at which a sync signal block is located is within the sync signal block measurement time.
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为所述处理器根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为所述处理器根据第二参数确定的;The communication device according to claim 50, wherein the time domain location where the control information is located is a time domain location after the first time domain location is increased by an offset, wherein the first time domain location is The processor is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, where the offset is determined by the processor according to the second parameter;
    其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
    所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first synchronization signal block is located;
    所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
    所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
    所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
  52. 根据权利要求48至51任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。The communication device according to any one of claims 48 to 51, wherein the first parameter further comprises a third parameter, and a maximum value of the third parameter is determined according to a first period or a fourth parameter, The first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of the search space of the control information.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。The communication device according to claim 52, wherein the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to the first period, or a third parameter The maximum value is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  54. 根据权利要求48至53任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。The communication device according to any one of claims 48 to 53, wherein the time domain location where the control information is located is the location of the frame in which the control information is located, and the time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located is The position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块还用于:The communication device according to claim 54, wherein the processing module is further configured to:
    根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在所述第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在所述第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, a time slot of the control information in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, where the first parameter includes a synchronization signal block In the case of the position of the frame, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, where the first parameter includes the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, where the first synchronization signal block is located The time domain location is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  56. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理模块,用于根据所述终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙;a processing module, configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
    通信模块,用于在所述时隙接收所述控制信息。And a communication module, configured to receive the control information in the time slot.
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块用于根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧,通信模块用于在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。The communication device according to claim 56, wherein the processing module is configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which control information is located, where the communication module is configured to The time slot in the frame receives the control information.
  58. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理模块,用于根据终端设备的标识和第一参数确定控制信息所在的时域位置,所述第一参数包括同步信号块所在的时域位置或同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;a processing module, configured to determine, according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first parameter, a time domain location where the control information is located, where the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located or a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located;
    通信模块,用于在所述控制信息所在的时域位置向所述终端设备发送所述控制信息。And a communication module, configured to send the control information to the terminal device at a time domain location where the control information is located.
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数包含同步信号块所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定;或,所述第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置,所述控制信息所在的时域位置与所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置之间的间隔根据所述终端设备的标识确定。The communication device according to claim 58, wherein the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, and a time domain location where the control information is located and a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located The interval between the two is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device; or the first parameter includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, and the time domain location where the control information is located and the measurement time of the synchronization signal block are located The interval between time domain locations is determined according to the identity of the terminal device.
  60. 根据权利要求58或59所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包括第一同步信号块的索引和/或所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期;其中,在第一参数 集合包含同步信号块所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数集合包含同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。The communication device according to claim 58 or claim 59, wherein the first parameter further comprises an index of the first synchronization signal block and/or a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information; wherein, in the first Where the parameter set includes a time domain location where the synchronization signal block is located, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter set includes a time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, The time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located is within the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  61. 根据权利要求60所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为第一时域位置增加偏移量之后的时域位置,其中,所述第一时域位置为根据所述终端设备的标识以及所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期确定的,所述偏移量为根据第二参数确定的;The communication device according to claim 60, wherein the time domain location in which the control information is located is a time domain location after the first time domain location is increased by an offset, wherein the first time domain location is based on Determining, by the identifier of the terminal device, the period in which the terminal device monitors the control information, the offset is determined according to the second parameter;
    其中,所述第二参数包括如下参数中的至少一种:The second parameter includes at least one of the following parameters:
    所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置;a time domain location where the first synchronization signal block is located;
    所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置;The synchronization signal block measures the time domain location where the time is located;
    所述第一同步信号块的索引;An index of the first synchronization signal block;
    所述终端设备的标识。The identifier of the terminal device.
  62. 根据权利要求58至61任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一参数还包含第三参数,所述第三参数的最大值根据第一周期或第四参数确定,所述第一周期为所述同步信号块的周期或所述同步信号块测量时间的周期,所述第四参数为所述控制信息的搜索空间的监测时机的间隔。The communication device according to any one of claims 58 to 61, wherein the first parameter further comprises a third parameter, and a maximum value of the third parameter is determined according to a first period or a fourth parameter, The first period is a period of the synchronization signal block or a period of the synchronization signal block measurement time, and the fourth parameter is an interval of a monitoring timing of the search space of the control information.
  63. 根据权利要求62所述的通信装置,其特征在于,在第十一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中,所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与所述第一周期的比值,或所述第三参数的最大值为所述终端设备监测所述控制信息的周期与第四参数的比值。The communication device according to claim 62, wherein in the fifth possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, the maximum value of the third parameter is a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information The ratio of the first period or the maximum value of the third parameter is a ratio of a period in which the terminal device monitors the control information to a fourth parameter.
  64. 根据权利要求58至63任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述控制信息所在的时域位置为所述控制信息所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块所在的帧的位置,所述同步信号块测量时间所在的时域位置为所述同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置。The communication device according to any one of claims 58 to 63, wherein the time domain location in which the control information is located is the location of the frame in which the control information is located, and the time domain location in which the synchronization signal block is located is The position of the frame where the synchronization signal block is located, and the time domain position where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located is the position of the frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located.
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块还用于:The communication device according to claim 64, wherein the processing module is further configured to:
    根据所述终端设备的标识和/或第一同步信息块的索引,确定所述控制信息在所述控制信息所在的帧中的时隙;其中,在第一参数包含同步信号块所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块为所述同步信号块,在第一参数包含同步信号块测量时间所在的帧的位置的情况下,所述第一同步信号块所在的时域位置在所述同步信号块测量时间内。Determining, according to the identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the first synchronization information block, a time slot of the control information in a frame in which the control information is located; wherein, where the first parameter includes a frame in which the synchronization signal block is located In the case of a location, the first synchronization signal block is the synchronization signal block, and in a case where the first parameter includes a position of a frame where the synchronization signal block measurement time is located, a time domain position where the first synchronization signal block is located During the synchronization signal block measurement time.
  66. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理模块,用于根据终端设备的标识和/或同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的时隙;a processing module, configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and/or an index of the synchronization signal block, a time slot in which the control information is located;
    通信模块,用于在所述时隙发送所述控制信息。And a communication module, configured to send the control information in the time slot.
  67. 根据权利要求66所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块用于根据所述终端设备的标识和所述同步信号块的索引,确定控制信息所在的帧;通信模块用于在所述帧中的所述时隙接收所述控制信息。The communication device according to claim 66, wherein the processing module is configured to determine, according to an identifier of the terminal device and an index of the synchronization signal block, a frame in which control information is located; The time slot in the frame receives the control information.
  68. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行权利要求1至25任一项所述的方法。A computer readable storage medium comprising instructions, wherein when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 25.
  69. 一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行权利要求1至25任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising instructions characterized by causing a computer to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 25 when it is run on a computer.
  70. 根据权利要求26至67任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置为终端或芯片。A communication device according to any one of claims 26 to 67, wherein the communication device is a terminal or a chip.
  71. 根据权利要求70所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述芯片为设置于终端内;或所述芯片设置于终端外并与所述终端耦合。The communication device according to claim 70, wherein said chip is disposed in said terminal; or said chip is disposed outside said terminal and coupled to said terminal.
  72. 一种处理器,所述处理器包括:至少一个电路,用于执行如权利要求1至25任一项所述的通信方法。A processor, comprising: at least one circuit for performing the communication method according to any one of claims 1 to 25.
PCT/CN2019/086323 2018-05-10 2019-05-10 Control information receiving method and communication apparatus WO2019214699A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810445023.1 2018-05-10
CN201810445023.1A CN110475319B (en) 2018-05-10 2018-05-10 Control information receiving method and communication device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019214699A1 true WO2019214699A1 (en) 2019-11-14

Family

ID=68467291

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/086323 WO2019214699A1 (en) 2018-05-10 2019-05-10 Control information receiving method and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110475319B (en)
WO (1) WO2019214699A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210306986A1 (en) * 2018-08-23 2021-09-30 Ntt Docomo, Inc. User terminal
EP3893568A1 (en) * 2020-04-09 2021-10-13 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America User equipment and base station involved in paging

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10979979B1 (en) * 2019-11-22 2021-04-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Synchronization signal block (SSB) measurements based on a measurement cycle frequency
CN110913444B (en) * 2019-12-25 2022-01-18 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 Method and device for measuring standby state NR cell
CN115767673A (en) * 2020-06-15 2023-03-07 华为技术有限公司 Information indication method and device
CN116171610A (en) * 2020-06-30 2023-05-26 高通股份有限公司 Multicast transmission based on synchronization signals
CN113965987B (en) * 2020-07-20 2024-02-09 维沃移动通信有限公司 SSB search information determining method and device and communication equipment
CN114765503B (en) * 2021-01-15 2024-01-30 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Signal receiving method, signal transmitting method, terminal, network device, and storage medium
CN113316236B (en) * 2021-06-09 2022-12-20 上海移远通信技术股份有限公司 Paging processing method, device, equipment and storage medium

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107079404A (en) * 2017-01-06 2017-08-18 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Paging signal sending method, paging signal method of reseptance, apparatus and system
US20180026698A1 (en) * 2016-07-20 2018-01-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for calculating beamforming based paging occasion in wireless communication system

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109245876B (en) * 2017-09-27 2019-09-03 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method of paging, the method and apparatus for communicating timing

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180026698A1 (en) * 2016-07-20 2018-01-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for calculating beamforming based paging occasion in wireless communication system
CN107079404A (en) * 2017-01-06 2017-08-18 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Paging signal sending method, paging signal method of reseptance, apparatus and system

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI: "Definition of Paging Occasion", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 #101 R2-1803644, 16 February 2018 (2018-02-16), XP051400667 *
HUAWEI: "Offline Summary for A1 7.1.3 on Paging", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING 91 DRAFT R1-1721356, 1 December 2017 (2017-12-01), XP051363970 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210306986A1 (en) * 2018-08-23 2021-09-30 Ntt Docomo, Inc. User terminal
EP3893568A1 (en) * 2020-04-09 2021-10-13 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America User equipment and base station involved in paging
WO2021204434A1 (en) * 2020-04-09 2021-10-14 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America User equipment and base station involved in paging

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110475319B (en) 2021-06-22
CN110475319A (en) 2019-11-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2019214699A1 (en) Control information receiving method and communication apparatus
US11626947B2 (en) Communication method and communications device
US20220070783A1 (en) Nr paging early indicator
US11140707B2 (en) Time resource assignment signaling mechanism for MSG3 transmission
US10555346B2 (en) Method for configuring physical channel, base station and user equipment
US11510249B2 (en) Flexible demodulation reference signal configuration for MSG3
US11539422B2 (en) Beam management method, terminal, network device, and storage medium
WO2018228270A1 (en) Measurement method, measurement configuration method, and related device
EP3753356B1 (en) Time resource assignment signaling mechanism for msg3 transmission
US20200374780A1 (en) Information processing method and apparatus
US20160337101A1 (en) Signal transmission method and signal transmission apparatus
WO2015110010A1 (en) Paging message transmission method and apparatus
CN111869273B (en) Method and apparatus for monitoring paging messages
JP2020520584A (en) Information transmission/reception method and related device
WO2016107518A1 (en) Method for receiving/sending paging message and related network and user equipment
JP7206273B2 (en) Detection window indication method and device
WO2020221318A1 (en) Uplink beam management method and apparatus
WO2019233175A1 (en) Signal transmission method and device
KR102419405B1 (en) Paging message transmission method and device
WO2019183905A1 (en) Signal transmission method, network device, and terminal device
US20210014736A1 (en) Communication method, communications apparatus, and system
CN113923750A (en) Method and device for accessing cell
CN111034328A (en) Techniques for generating and/or managing RNTIs
WO2022083626A1 (en) Signal transmission method, network device, terminal and storage medium
EP3860273A1 (en) Information processing method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19800251

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19800251

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1